AR O2C Cycle

11i Order To Cash
Fundamentals
Volume 2 - Student Guide
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
D11435GC10
al
Edition 1.0
r n
May 2002
t e
D34664
e In
c l
r a
O
Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2002. All rights reserved.
This documentation contains proprietary information of Oracle Corporation. It is provided under a license agreement containing
restrictions on use and disclosure and is also protected by copyright law. Reverse engineering of the software is prohibited. If this
documentation is delivered to a U.S. Government Agency of the Department of Defense, then it is delivered with Restricted Rights
and the following legend is applicable:
Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions for commercial computer software and shall be deemed
to be Restricted Rights software under Federal law, as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of DFARS 252.227-7013, Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software (October 1988).
This material or any portion of it may not be copied in any form or by any means without the express prior written permission of the
Education Products group of Oracle Corporation. Any other copying is a violation of copyright law and may result in civil and/or
criminal penalties.
If this documentation is delivered to a U.S. Government Agency not within the Department of Defense, then it is delivered with
“Restricted Rights,” as defined in FAR 52.227-14, Rights in Data-General, including Alternate III (June 1987).
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the documentation, please report
them in writing to Worldwide Education Services, Oracle Corporation, 500 Oracle Parkway, Box SB-6, Redwood Shores, CA 94065.
Oracle Corporation does not warrant that this document is error-free.
Oracle and all references to Oracle Products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation.
All other products or company names are used for identification purposes only, and may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Authors
Eric O'Brien, Pam Freeman, Jinny Valenzuela, Kathy Wohnutka
Technical Contributors and Reviewers

n l y
Terri North, Atul Rai, Elizabeth Looney, Carol Chang, Tony Cash, Lori Burke
e O
This book was published using: oracletutor
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Table of Contents
Order To Cash Lifecycle Overview................................................................................................................1-1

Order to Cash Lifecycle Overview................................................................................................................1-2
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................1-3
Order to Cash Lifecycle.................................................................................................................................1-4
Order Lifecycle..............................................................................................................................................1-5
Overview of Application Integration.............................................................................................................1-6
Customer Entry Methods...............................................................................................................................1-7
Business Purposes .........................................................................................................................................1-8
New Party Model Features ............................................................................................................................1-9
Order Management Process...........................................................................................................................1-10
Viewing and Managing Orders .....................................................................................................................1-11
Pricing Process ..............................................................................................................................................1-12
Shipping Process ...........................................................................................................................................1-13
AutoInvoice Process......................................................................................................................................1-14
Receivables Process.......................................................................................................................................1-15
Cash Management Process ............................................................................................................................1-16
Summary........................................................................................................................................................1-17
Overview of Oracle Order Management Process .........................................................................................2-1
Overview of Oracle Order Management Process ..........................................................................................2-2
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................2-3
Overview of Order Management in the Order to Cash Live Cycle ...............................................................2-4
Overview of Order Management Integration ................................................................................................2-5
Overview of the Order Management Process................................................................................................2-6
Overview of Customer Relationships............................................................................................................2-7
Overview of Inventory Organizations ...........................................................................................................2-8
n l y
O
Overview of Inventory Items.........................................................................................................................2-9
Overview of Order Entry...............................................................................................................................2-10
e
s
Overview of Managing Orders......................................................................................................................2-11
Summary........................................................................................................................................................2-12
U
I
Inventory Organizations .................................................................................................................................3-1
Inventory Organizations ................................................................................................................................3-2
A
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................3-3
O
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................3-4
What is Enterprise Structure? ........................................................................................................................3-5
d
Enterprise Structure Example 1.....................................................................................................................3-7
a n
Enterprise Structure Example 2.....................................................................................................................3-8
Enterprise Structure Considerations ..............................................................................................................3-10
a l
Enterprise Structure in Vision .......................................................................................................................3-12
Guided Demonstration – Enterprise Structure in Vision Operations.........................................................3-13
r n
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................3-14
Define Units of Measure ...............................................................................................................................3-15
t e
Unit of Measure Example..............................................................................................................................3-17
In
Define Unit of Measure Classes ....................................................................................................................3-18
Unit of Measure Conversion .........................................................................................................................3-19
e
Guided Demonstration - Create an Unit of Measure .................................................................................3-21
l
Practice - Create a Unit of Measure...........................................................................................................3-22
c
Solution – Create an Unit of Measure .......................................................................................................3-23
r a
Defining Intra-class Conversions ..................................................................................................................3-25
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................3-26
O Defining Locations ........................................................................................................................................3-27

Examples of Locations ..................................................................................................................................3-28
11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

i
Guided Demonstration - Create a Location ...............................................................................................3-29
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................3-31
Inventory Organizations ................................................................................................................................3-32
Inventory Organization Setup........................................................................................................................3-33
Guided Demonstrations - Create an Inventory Organization ....................................................................3-35
Setup Considerations for Order Management ...............................................................................................3-36
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................3-37
Establishing Inventory Parameters ................................................................................................................3-38
Inventory Parameters and Execution .............................................................................................................3-39
Inventory Parameters and Financial Impact ..................................................................................................3-40
Inventory Parameters and Order Management ..............................................................................................3-42
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................3-43
Sub-inventories..............................................................................................................................................3-44
Guided Demonstration - Create a Sub-Inventory ......................................................................................3-45
Practice - Create a Sub-Inventory..............................................................................................................3-46
Solution – Create a Sub-Inventory ............................................................................................................3-47
Summary........................................................................................................................................................3-49
Enter Items.......................................................................................................................................................4-1
Enter Items.....................................................................................................................................................4-2
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................4-3
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................4-4
What is an Item?............................................................................................................................................4-5
Oracle Applications Use Items ......................................................................................................................4-6
How Do Oracle Applications Use Items?......................................................................................................4-7
Item Attributes...............................................................................................................................................4-9
Item Statuses Representing the Lifecycle......................................................................................................4-11
Item Attributes Used in Item Status...............................................................................................................4-13
Guided Demonstration - Create an Item Status .........................................................................................4-15
Item Master Organization and Child Organizations ......................................................................................4-17
n l y
O
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................4-19
Creating an Item ............................................................................................................................................4-20
e
Implementation Considerations .....................................................................................................................4-21
U s
Describing Item Attributes – Order Management .........................................................................................4-22
Describing Item Attributes - Invoicing..........................................................................................................4-25
I
Guided Demonstration - View Item Attributes..........................................................................................4-27
Describing Attributes Controls at Master Level............................................................................................4-28
A
Describing Attributes Controls at Child Level ..............................................................................................4-29
O
Describing Item Status Attribute Controls ....................................................................................................4-31
Describing Item Templates............................................................................................................................4-32
d
Creating Item Templates................................................................................................................................4-33
a n
Using Item Templates....................................................................................................................................4-35
Guided Demonstration - Create an Item ....................................................................................................4-36
a l
Practice - Create an Item............................................................................................................................4-38
Solution – Create an Item ..........................................................................................................................4-39
r n
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................4-44
t e
Describing Item Categories ...........................................................................................................................4-45
Create Item Categories ..................................................................................................................................4-46
In
Establish the Relationship Between the Category, Category Set and Item ...................................................4-47
Guided Demonstration - Create a Category...............................................................................................4-48
e
Describing and Using Item Catalogs .............................................................................................................4-49
c l
Define Item Relationships – Order Management ..........................................................................................4-50
Guided Demonstration - Define Item Relationships..................................................................................4-51
r a
Additional Setup Considerations ...................................................................................................................4-52
Summary........................................................................................................................................................4-54
O
Manage Parties and Customer Accounts ......................................................................................................5-1
Manage Parties and Customer Accounts .......................................................................................................5-2

ii
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................5-3
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................5-4
New Party Model Overview ..........................................................................................................................5-5
New Party Model...........................................................................................................................................5-6
New Party Model Features ............................................................................................................................5-7
New Party Model Components......................................................................................................................5-8
Managing Parties ...........................................................................................................................................5-9
Party Sites......................................................................................................................................................5-10
Customer Accounts .......................................................................................................................................5-11
Integrating Party Information ........................................................................................................................5-12
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................5-13
Profile Classes ...............................................................................................................................................5-14
Profile Class Characteristics ..........................................................................................................................5-15
Guided Demostration - Create a Profile Class...........................................................................................5-16
Practice - Create a Profile Class ................................................................................................................5-17
Solution - Create a Profile Class................................................................................................................5-18
Managing Party Profiles ................................................................................................................................5-21
Updating Profile Classes ...............................................................................................................................5-22
Reviewing Profile Class Changes..................................................................................................................5-23
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................5-24
Find/Enter Parties ..........................................................................................................................................5-25
Find/Enter Search Options ............................................................................................................................5-26
Fuzzy Search .................................................................................................................................................5-27
Word Replacement ........................................................................................................................................5-28
Entry Methods ...............................................................................................................................................5-29
Interface Data Entry ......................................................................................................................................5-30
Business Issues ..............................................................................................................................................5-31
n l
Setting Tax Attributes....................................................................................................................................5-32
Business Purposes .........................................................................................................................................5-33
Multiple Sites and Business Purposes: Centralized Example........................................................................5-34
y
Multiple Sites and Business Purposes: Decentralized Example ....................................................................5-35
e O
Using Standard and Quick Entry...................................................................................................................5-36
s
Guided Demostration - Enter a Standard Customer ..................................................................................5-38
Practice - Enter a Standard Customer ........................................................................................................5-40
U
Solution - Enter a Standard Customer .......................................................................................................5-41
A I
Differences Between Standard and Quick Entry ...........................................................................................5-45
Guided Demonstration - Enter a Quick Customer.....................................................................................5-46
Practice - Enter a Quick Customer ............................................................................................................5-47
d O
Solution - Enter a Quick Customer............................................................................................................5-48
Data Quality Management (DQM)................................................................................................................5-50
a n
How Does DQM Work?................................................................................................................................5-51
Dun & Bradstreet (D&B) Integration............................................................................................................5-52
a l
D&B Data Formats........................................................................................................................................5-53
D&B Online ..................................................................................................................................................5-54
r n
D&B Batch Loading......................................................................................................................................5-55
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................5-56
t e
Customer Account Relationships ..................................................................................................................5-57
Guided Demonstration - Create Customer Relationships..........................................................................5-58
In
Practice - Create Customer Relationships .................................................................................................5-60
Solution - Create Customer Relationships.................................................................................................5-61
e
c l
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................5-62
Merge Parties or Customer Accounts ............................................................................................................5-63
r a
Party Merge ...................................................................................................................................................5-65
Guided Demonstration - Perform a Customer Merge................................................................................5-66
O Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................5-67
Reviewing Information..................................................................................................................................5-68
Common Search Scenarios............................................................................................................................5-69

iii
Summary........................................................................................................................................................5-70
Enter Orders ....................................................................................................................................................6-1
Enter Orders ..................................................................................................................................................6-2
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................6-3
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................6-4
Order Creation Methods ................................................................................................................................6-5
Order Management Workflows .....................................................................................................................6-6
Defaulting Rules............................................................................................................................................6-7
Credit Checking.............................................................................................................................................6-8
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................6-9
Order Header .................................................................................................................................................6-10
Order Transaction Type.................................................................................................................................6-11
Entering Header Customer Information ........................................................................................................6-12
Entering Header Pricing Information ............................................................................................................6-13
Guided Demonstration - Entering Order Header.......................................................................................6-14
Practice - Create a Sales Order ..................................................................................................................6-15
Solution - Create a Sales Order .................................................................................................................6-16
Applying Sales Credits ..................................................................................................................................6-20
Guided Demonstration - Applying Sales Credits ......................................................................................6-21
Entering Additional Header Information.......................................................................................................6-22
Guided Demonstration - Enter Additional Header Information ................................................................6-23
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................6-24
Line Transaction Type...................................................................................................................................6-25
Line Statuses..................................................................................................................................................6-26
Entering Line Information .............................................................................................................................6-27
Guided Demonstration - Entering Line Information .................................................................................6-28
Entering Line Pricing Information ................................................................................................................6-29
Guided Demonstration - Entering Line Pricing Information.....................................................................6-30
n l y
Line Pricing Fields ........................................................................................................................................6-31
O
Line Date Fields ............................................................................................................................................6-32
Entering Line Shipping Information..............................................................................................................6-33
Guided Demonstration - Entering Line Shipping Information ..................................................................6-34
e
U s
Entering Line Sets .........................................................................................................................................6-35
Entering Line Addresses................................................................................................................................6-36
I
Entering Return Information .........................................................................................................................6-37
Ordering Service Programs ...........................................................................................................................6-38
A
Guided Demonstration - Ordering Service Programs................................................................................6-39
O
Entering Project Information .........................................................................................................................6-40
Splitting Order Lines .....................................................................................................................................6-41
d
Guided Demonstration - Splitting Order Lines .........................................................................................6-42
a n
Practice - Split Line and Create Ship Set...................................................................................................6-43
Solution - Split Line and Create Ship Set..................................................................................................6-44
a l
Applying Attachments...................................................................................................................................6-48
Guided Demonstration - Applying Attachments .......................................................................................6-49
r n
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................6-51
t e
Scheduling - Available to Promise ................................................................................................................6-52
Guided Demonstration - Scheduling Available to Promise.......................................................................6-53
In
Scheduling - Schedule ...................................................................................................................................6-54
Guided Demonstration - Scheduling an Order Line ..................................................................................6-55
e
Practice - Schedule Order ..........................................................................................................................6-56
c l
Solution - Schedule Order .........................................................................................................................6-58
Scheduling - Reserve.....................................................................................................................................6-62
r a
Guided Demonstration - Reserving an Order Line....................................................................................6-63
Scheduling Options .......................................................................................................................................6-64
O Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................6-65
Booking Orders .............................................................................................................................................6-66

iv
Guided Demonstration - Booking Orders..................................................................................................6-67
Practice - Book Order ................................................................................................................................6-68
Solution - Book Order ...............................................................................................................................6-69
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................6-74
Copying Orders .............................................................................................................................................6-75
Guided Demonstration - Copying Orders..................................................................................................6-76
Practice - Copy a Sales Order....................................................................................................................6-77
Solution - Copy a Sales Order: ..................................................................................................................6-78
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................6-86
Drop Ship Overview......................................................................................................................................6-87
Creating Drop Ship Order Lines....................................................................................................................6-88
Guided Demonstration - Creating Drop Ship Order Lines ........................................................................6-89
Practice - Create a Drop Ship Order ..........................................................................................................6-91
Solution - Create a Sales Order .................................................................................................................6-92
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................6-95
Internal Requisition Overview.......................................................................................................................6-96
Creating an Internal Order.............................................................................................................................6-97
Guided Demonstration - Creating an Internal Order .................................................................................6-98
Practice - Create an Internal Sales Order...................................................................................................6-100
Solution - Create an Internal Sales Order ..................................................................................................6-102
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................6-112
Import Orders Processing ..............................................................................................................................6-113
Guided Demonstration - Running Order Import .......................................................................................6-114
Summary........................................................................................................................................................6-115
Managing Orders.............................................................................................................................................7-1
Managing Orders ...........................................................................................................................................7-2
y
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................7-3
l
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................7-4
Order Organizer Overview ............................................................................................................................7-5
n
O
Find Orders....................................................................................................................................................7-6
Summary Form ..............................................................................................................................................7-8
e
Guided Demonstration – Summary Form..................................................................................................7-10
U s
Navigator Tree Functionality.........................................................................................................................7-11
Guided Demonstration – Navigator Tree ..................................................................................................7-12
I
Folder Files....................................................................................................................................................7-13
Guided Demonstration - Folder File..........................................................................................................7-14
A
Practice - Order Organizer.........................................................................................................................7-15
O
Solution - Order Organizer ........................................................................................................................7-17
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................7-22
d
Processing Constraints...................................................................................................................................7-23
a n
Update Orders and Order Lines.....................................................................................................................7-25
Guided Demonstration – Update Order.....................................................................................................7-27
a l
Practice - Update Order .............................................................................................................................7-28
Solution - Update Order ............................................................................................................................7-29
r n
Mass Updates.................................................................................................................................................7-32
t e
Guided Demonstration – Mass Change .....................................................................................................7-33
Practice - Mass Change .............................................................................................................................7-34
In
Solution - Mass Change.............................................................................................................................7-35
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................7-41
e
Workflow Notification Overview..................................................................................................................7-42
c l
Respond to Notification.................................................................................................................................7-43
Guided Demonstration – Workflow Notifications ....................................................................................7-44
r a
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................7-45
Automatic System Holds ...............................................................................................................................7-46
OHold Names ...................................................................................................................................................7-48

Guided Demonstration – Create Hold Name.............................................................................................7-49

v
Practice - Create Hold Name .....................................................................................................................7-50
Solution - Create Hold Name ....................................................................................................................7-51
Apply Holds ..................................................................................................................................................7-53
Guided Demonstration – Apply Holds ......................................................................................................7-55
Practice - Apply Holds ..............................................................................................................................7-57
Solution - Apply Holds..............................................................................................................................7-59
Release Holds ................................................................................................................................................7-70
Guided Demonstration – Release Holds....................................................................................................7-72
Practice - Release Holds ............................................................................................................................7-74
Solution - Release Holds ...........................................................................................................................7-75
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................7-82
Cancel Orders ................................................................................................................................................7-83
Guided Demonstration – Cancel Order .....................................................................................................7-85
Practice - Cancel Order..............................................................................................................................7-87
Solution -Cancel Order..............................................................................................................................7-88
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................7-92
Close Orders and Lines .................................................................................................................................7-93
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................7-94
Order Purge ...................................................................................................................................................7-95
Guided Demonstration – Purge Order .......................................................................................................7-97
Summary........................................................................................................................................................7-98
Overview of Pricing .........................................................................................................................................8-1
Overview of Pricing ......................................................................................................................................8-2
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................8-3
Overview of Pricing in the Order to Cash Process ........................................................................................8-5
Overview of Pricing Integration ....................................................................................................................8-6
Overview of the Pricing Concept ..................................................................................................................8-7
Overview of the Pricing Engine ....................................................................................................................8-8
n l y
O
Overview of Price Lists .................................................................................................................................8-9
Overview of Qualifiers and Modifiers...........................................................................................................8-10
e
Overview of Basic vs. Advanced Pricing......................................................................................................8-11
U s
Summary........................................................................................................................................................8-13
Basic Pricing.....................................................................................................................................................9-1
A I
Basic Pricing..................................................................................................................................................9-2
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................9-3
O
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................9-4
Pricing Engine Overview ..............................................................................................................................9-5
d
Pricing Engine Pyramid.................................................................................................................................9-7
a n
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................9-8
Price List Creation .........................................................................................................................................9-9
a l
Price List Header ...........................................................................................................................................9-10
Guided Demonstration – Price List Header...............................................................................................9-12
r n
Price List Line ...............................................................................................................................................9-14
Price List Line Values ...................................................................................................................................9-16
t e
Guided Demonstration – Price List Line ...................................................................................................9-18
In
Price List Mapping for Basic Pricing ............................................................................................................9-20
Practice - Create Price List ........................................................................................................................9-21
Solution - Create Price List .......................................................................................................................9-22
l e
Add Items to Price List..................................................................................................................................9-27
c
Guided Demonstration - Add Items to New Price List..............................................................................9-28
r a
Copy Price List ..............................................................................................................................................9-29
Guided Demonstration – Create a Price List .............................................................................................9-30
O Practice - Copy Price List ..........................................................................................................................9-31

Solution - Copy Price List .........................................................................................................................9-32
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................9-34

vi
Price List Maintenance - Overview ...............................................................................................................9-35
Manual Price List Updates ............................................................................................................................9-36
Guided Demonstration – Manual Price List Update..................................................................................9-37
Practice - Manual Price List Update ..........................................................................................................9-38
Solution - Manual Price List Update .........................................................................................................9-39
Adjust Price List ............................................................................................................................................9-41
Guided Demonstration – Adjust Price List................................................................................................9-43
Practice - Adjust Price List........................................................................................................................9-44
Solution - Adjust Price List .......................................................................................................................9-45
Add Items to Price List For Maintenance......................................................................................................9-47
Practice - Add Items to a Price List ...........................................................................................................9-48
Solution - Add Items to a Price List ..........................................................................................................9-49
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................9-51
Agreement Overview.....................................................................................................................................9-52
Agreement .....................................................................................................................................................9-54
Guided Demonstration – Agreement Price List.........................................................................................9-55
Practice - Agreement Price List.................................................................................................................9-59
Solution - Agreement Price List ................................................................................................................9-60
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................9-64
Formula Overview.........................................................................................................................................9-65
Basic Pricing Formula ...................................................................................................................................9-66
Pricing Attribute ............................................................................................................................................9-67
Factor List......................................................................................................................................................9-68
Guided Demonstration – Pricing Formula.................................................................................................9-70
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................9-71
Qualifier Overview........................................................................................................................................9-72
Seeded Qualifier Contexts .............................................................................................................................9-73
n l
Modifier Overview ........................................................................................................................................9-76 y
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................9-75
Modifier Structure .........................................................................................................................................9-77
e O
Modifier List..................................................................................................................................................9-78
Modifiers Lines .............................................................................................................................................9-79
s
Pricing Adjustment Examples .......................................................................................................................9-81
Discounts/Charges.........................................................................................................................................9-82
U
Guided Demonstration – Create Modifiers................................................................................................9-84
A I
Practice - Create Modifiers........................................................................................................................9-88
Solution - Create Modifiers .......................................................................................................................9-90
Summary........................................................................................................................................................9-98
d O
Overview of Shipping Execution ....................................................................................................................10-1
Overview of Oracle Shipping Execution.......................................................................................................10-2
a n
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................10-3
a l
Overview of Shipping in the Order to Cash Process .....................................................................................10-5
Overview of the Shipping Process ................................................................................................................10-6
r n
Overview of Shipping Execution Integration................................................................................................10-7
t e
Overview of Shipping Concepts....................................................................................................................10-8
Overview of Pick Release .............................................................................................................................10-9
In
Overview of Pick Confirm and Staging Sub-inventory.................................................................................10-10
Overview of Delivery Management ..............................................................................................................10-11
e
Overview of Ship Confirmation ....................................................................................................................10-12
c l
Summary........................................................................................................................................................10-13
r a
Shipping............................................................................................................................................................11-1
Shipping.........................................................................................................................................................11-2
O Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................11-3
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................11-4
Ship Order .....................................................................................................................................................11-5

vii
Shipping Concepts.........................................................................................................................................11-7
Pick Release Concepts...................................................................................................................................11-9
Shipping Transactions User Interface............................................................................................................11-11
Pick Release Process Flow ............................................................................................................................11-13
Ship Confirm Process Flow...........................................................................................................................11-15
Delivery Line Processing Statuses ................................................................................................................11-18
Shipping Roles and User Security .................................................................................................................11-20
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................11-21
Pick Release Parameters ................................................................................................................................11-22
Methods to Pick Release................................................................................................................................11-24
Configurable Process.....................................................................................................................................11-25
Auto Create Delivery.....................................................................................................................................11-27
Release Sales Orders .....................................................................................................................................11-28
Guided Demonstration – Release Sales Orders .........................................................................................11-30
Practice - Release Sales Orders .................................................................................................................11-32
Solution - Release Sales Orders.................................................................................................................11-33
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................11-40
Shipping Parameters ......................................................................................................................................11-41
Ship Confirm .................................................................................................................................................11-42
Guided Demonstration – Ship Confirm Delivery ......................................................................................11-44
Practice - Ship Confirm Delivery ..............................................................................................................11-47
Solution - Ship Confirm Delivery..............................................................................................................11-49
Shipping Documents .....................................................................................................................................11-63
Guided Demonstration – View Shipping Documents................................................................................11-64
Shipping Exceptions......................................................................................................................................11-65
Guided Demonstration – View Shipping Exceptions ................................................................................11-67
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................11-69
n l
Pick Release Parameters ................................................................................................................................11-72y
Shipping Parameters ......................................................................................................................................11-70
Delivery Grouping.........................................................................................................................................11-74
Guided Demonstration – Define Shipping Exceptions..............................................................................11-78

e O
Shipping Exceptions......................................................................................................................................11-76
s
Pick Slip Grouping Rules ..............................................................................................................................11-79
Guided Demonstration – Define Pick Slip Grouping Rules ......................................................................11-80
U
Practice - Define Pick Slip Grouping Rules ..............................................................................................11-81
A I
Solution - Define Pick Slip Grouping Rules..............................................................................................11-82
Release Sequence Rules ................................................................................................................................11-83
Guided Demonstration – Define Release Sequence Rules ........................................................................11-85
d O
Practice - Define Release Sequence Rules ................................................................................................11-86
Solution -Define Release Sequence Rules.................................................................................................11-87
a n
Release Rules.................................................................................................................................................11-88
Guided Demonstration – Define Release Rules ........................................................................................11-90
a l
Practice - Define Release Rules.................................................................................................................11-92
Solution - Define Release Rules ................................................................................................................11-93
r n
Container Load Details..................................................................................................................................11-95
Guided Demonstration – Define Container Load Details..........................................................................11-96
t e
Ship Methods- Carriers- Relationships..........................................................................................................11-97
Guided Demonstration – Define Carrier Ship Methods ............................................................................11-100
In
Guided Demonstration – Define Freight Carriers......................................................................................11-101
Freight Cost Types ........................................................................................................................................11-102
e
c l
Guided Demonstration – Define Freight Cost Types ................................................................................11-103
Freight Cost – Freight Charges......................................................................................................................11-104
r a
Shipping Document Sets ...............................................................................................................................11-106
Guided Demonstration – Define Document Sets.......................................................................................11-107
O Choose Printers..............................................................................................................................................11-108
Shipping Roles and User Security .................................................................................................................11-109
Guided Demonstration – Define Roles......................................................................................................11-110

viii
Guided Demonstration – Grant Access to Roles .......................................................................................11-111
Practice - Define Roles ..............................................................................................................................11-112
Solution - Define Roles .............................................................................................................................11-113
Practice - Grant Access to Roles ...............................................................................................................11-118
Solution -Grant Access to Roles................................................................................................................11-119
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................11-121
Shipping Programs and APIs.........................................................................................................................11-122
Summary........................................................................................................................................................11-123
Overview of Oracle Receivables Process .......................................................................................................12-1
Overview of Oracle Receivables Process ......................................................................................................12-2
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................12-3
Overview of Receivables in the Order to Cash Process ................................................................................12-5
Overview of the Receivables Process............................................................................................................12-6
Overview of Receivables Integration ............................................................................................................12-7
Overview of the Transaction Process ............................................................................................................12-8
Overview of Other Invoice Operations .........................................................................................................12-9
Overview of Adjustments..............................................................................................................................12-10
Overview of the AutoInvoice Process ...........................................................................................................12-11
Overview of Receipts and Remittances.........................................................................................................12-12
Overview of Collections................................................................................................................................12-13
Overview of Tax............................................................................................................................................12-14
Summary........................................................................................................................................................12-15
Process Invoices ...............................................................................................................................................13-1
Process Invoices ............................................................................................................................................13-2
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................13-3
Oracle Receivables Overview .......................................................................................................................13-5

Transactions Overview..................................................................................................................................13-6n l y
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................13-4
Guided Demonstration - Review Transaction Workbench........................................................................13-8

e O
Transactions Workbench Windows...............................................................................................................13-7
s
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................13-9
Invoice Entry Methods ..................................................................................................................................13-10
U
Creating a Standard Invoice Manually ..........................................................................................................13-11
A I
Invoice Components......................................................................................................................................13-12
Transactions Window Tabs ...........................................................................................................................13-14
O
Required Transaction Information.................................................................................................................13-15
Entering Invoice Dates ..................................................................................................................................13-16
d
Transaction Defaults......................................................................................................................................13-17
a n
Standard Invoice Line Types.........................................................................................................................13-19
Entering Freight Invoices or Lines ................................................................................................................13-20
a l
Entering Sales Credits ...................................................................................................................................13-21
Completing Transactions...............................................................................................................................13-22
r n
Guided Demonstration - Enter Invoice......................................................................................................13-23
Practice - Enter and Complete an Invoice .................................................................................................13-24
t e
Solution - Enter and Complete an Invoice.................................................................................................13-25
In
Creating Invoice Batches...............................................................................................................................13-27
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................13-28
Creating Copies of Invoices ..........................................................................................................................13-29
l e
Using Recurring Rules ..................................................................................................................................13-30
c
Guided Demostration - Copy Invoices ......................................................................................................13-32
r a
Practice - Copy Invoice .............................................................................................................................13-33
Solution - Copy Invoice.............................................................................................................................13-34
O Creating Invoices with Rules.........................................................................................................................13-36

Accounting Rules ..........................................................................................................................................13-37
Assigning Accounting Rules to Invoice Lines ..............................................................................................13-38

ix
Using Invoices With Rules............................................................................................................................13-39
Example of Billing in Advance .....................................................................................................................13-40
Example of Billing in Arrears .......................................................................................................................13-41
Guided Demonstration - Use Rules ...........................................................................................................13-42
Deferred Accounting Rules ...........................................................................................................................13-43
Revenue Recognition Program......................................................................................................................13-44
Guided Demonstration - Run Revenue Recognition .................................................................................13-45
Making Adjustments Using Revenue Accounting ........................................................................................13-46
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................13-47
Invoice Transaction Flow ..............................................................................................................................13-48
Invoice Correction Methods ..........................................................................................................................13-49
Overview of Corrections ...............................................................................................................................13-50
Overview of Corrections (Continued) ...........................................................................................................13-51
Updating Invoices..........................................................................................................................................13-52
Creating Debit Memos...................................................................................................................................13-53
Creating Adjustments ....................................................................................................................................13-54
Guided Demonstration - Enter an Adjustment ..........................................................................................13-55
Applying Different Types of Credits.............................................................................................................13-56
Credit Memo Options ....................................................................................................................................13-57
Guided Demonstration - Enter a Credit Memo..........................................................................................13-59
Practice - Create a Credit Memo................................................................................................................13-60
Solution - Create a Credit Memo...............................................................................................................13-61
On-Account Credit Options...........................................................................................................................13-64
Guided Demonstration - Enter On-Account Credit ...................................................................................13-65
Reversing Sales Credits .................................................................................................................................13-66
Creating Refunds ...........................................................................................................................................13-67
Voiding Transactions.....................................................................................................................................13-69
n l y
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................13-70
Reports...........................................................................................................................................................13-71
Printing Transactions.....................................................................................................................................13-72
e O
Process for Printing Transactions ..................................................................................................................13-73
Guided Demonstration - Print Transactions ..............................................................................................13-74
s
Practice - Print Transactions......................................................................................................................13-75
Solution - Print Transactions .....................................................................................................................13-76
U
How Oracle Receivables Uses Statements ....................................................................................................13-78
A I
Using Consolidated Billing ...........................................................................................................................13-79
Guided Demonstration - Run Consolidated Billing...................................................................................13-80
Practice - Print Consolidated Billing .........................................................................................................13-81
d O
Solution - Print Consolidated Billing ........................................................................................................13-82
Summary........................................................................................................................................................13-84
a n
Process Invoices Using AutoInvoice...............................................................................................................14-1
Process Invoices Using AutoInvoice.............................................................................................................14-2
a l
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................14-3
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................14-4
r n
AutoInvoice Process......................................................................................................................................14-5
t e
AutoInvoice Integration.................................................................................................................................14-6
What Occurs During AutoInvoice.................................................................................................................14-7
In
AutoInvoice Interface Tables ........................................................................................................................14-8
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................14-10
e
Transaction Batch Sources ............................................................................................................................14-11
c l
Defining Transaction Batch Sources .............................................................................................................14-12
Guided Demonstration - Define Batch Source ..........................................................................................14-13
r a
Grouping Rules..............................................................................................................................................14-16
Grouping Transaction Attributes ...................................................................................................................14-17
O Grouping Rule Hierarchy ..............................................................................................................................14-18

Line Ordering Rules ......................................................................................................................................14-19

x
Guided Demonstration - Define Line Ordering Rules...............................................................................14-20
Guided Demonstration - Define Grouping Rules ......................................................................................14-21
Transaction Flexfields ...................................................................................................................................14-22
Defining Transaction Flexfields ....................................................................................................................14-23
Determining Tax Liability .............................................................................................................................14-24
AutoInvoice Validation .................................................................................................................................14-25
Submitting AutoInvoice ................................................................................................................................14-26
Guided Demonstration - Submit AutoInvoice ...........................................................................................14-27
Managing AutoInvoice System Options........................................................................................................14-28
Implementation Considerations .....................................................................................................................14-29
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................14-30
Correct Errors Overview ...............................................................................................................................14-31
AutoInvoice Exception Handling Windows..................................................................................................14-32
Guided Demonstration - Correct Errors ....................................................................................................14-34
Practice - Correct Errors ............................................................................................................................14-35
Solution - Correct Errors ...........................................................................................................................14-36
Summary........................................................................................................................................................14-40
Implement Customer Invoicing......................................................................................................................15-1
Implement Customer Invoicing .....................................................................................................................15-2
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................15-3
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................15-4
Required Setup Steps for Transactions..........................................................................................................15-5
Receivables Transaction Types .....................................................................................................................15-6
Guided Demonstration - Setup Transaction Types....................................................................................15-7
Using Natural Application.............................................................................................................................15-9
AutoAccounting ............................................................................................................................................15-10
Guided Demonstration - Create Payment Terms .......................................................................................15-12
n
Transaction Sources.......................................................................................................................................15-13
y
Payment Terms ..............................................................................................................................................15-11
l
Guided Demonstration - Define Transaction Source.................................................................................15-14
O
Remit-to Addresses .......................................................................................................................................15-15
Guided Demonstration - Define Remit-To Address ..................................................................................15-16
e
U s
System Options Relating to Transactions......................................................................................................15-17
Miscellaneous System Options......................................................................................................................15-19
I
Guided Demonstration - Define System Options ......................................................................................15-21
Profile Options ..............................................................................................................................................15-23
A
Implementation Considerations for Transactions ..........................................................................................15-24
O
Implementation Considerations for Remit-To Addresses..............................................................................15-25
Optional Setup Steps for Transactions ..........................................................................................................15-26
d
Accounting Rules ..........................................................................................................................................15-28
a n
Salespeople ....................................................................................................................................................15-29
Standard Memo Lines....................................................................................................................................15-30
a l
Setting Up Document Sequencing.................................................................................................................15-31
Setting Up Gapless Transaction Numbering .................................................................................................15-32
r n
Setting Up Statements ...................................................................................................................................15-34
t e
Consolidated Billing Invoices .......................................................................................................................15-35
Setting Up Consolidated Billing....................................................................................................................15-36
In
Transaction Printing Views Overview ..........................................................................................................15-37
Transaction Printing Views ...........................................................................................................................15-38
e
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................15-39
c l
Define Transaction Types in Order ...............................................................................................................15-40
Implementation Considerations for Document Sequencing Enhancements ..................................................15-41
r a
Function Security...........................................................................................................................................15-42
Summary........................................................................................................................................................15-43
O
Manual Receipts ..............................................................................................................................................16-1
Manual Receipts ............................................................................................................................................16-2

xi
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................16-3
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................16-4
Oracle Receivables Overview .......................................................................................................................16-5
Overview of Receipts ....................................................................................................................................16-6
Receipt Creation ............................................................................................................................................16-7
Cash Receipt Statuses....................................................................................................................................16-8
Manual Receipt Entry Process.......................................................................................................................16-9
Manual Receipt Types ...................................................................................................................................16-10
Manual Receipts Versus QuickCash Receipts...............................................................................................16-11
Guided Demostration - Enter Manual Receipts.........................................................................................16-12
Practice - Enter Manual Receipts ..............................................................................................................16-13
Solution - Enter Manual Receipts..............................................................................................................16-14
Creating Batches............................................................................................................................................16-17
Validating Receipts in Batches......................................................................................................................16-18
Batch Statuses................................................................................................................................................16-19
Guided Demonstration - Create Receipt Batch..........................................................................................16-20
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................16-21
Applying Batch Receipts ...............................................................................................................................16-22
Applying Receipts to an Invoice ...................................................................................................................16-23
Applications Window....................................................................................................................................16-24
Guided Demonstration - Apply Receipts...................................................................................................16-25
Practice - Apply Receipt............................................................................................................................16-26
Solution - Apply Receipt ...........................................................................................................................16-27
Criteria for Mass Applying Receipts .............................................................................................................16-28
Guided Demonstration - Use Mass Apply.................................................................................................16-29
Practice - Use Mass Apply ........................................................................................................................16-30
Solution – Use Mass Apply .......................................................................................................................16-31
Applying Cross Currency Receipts ...............................................................................................................16-32
Guided Demonstration - Apply Cross Currency Receipt ..........................................................................16-33
n l y
Entering Discounts ........................................................................................................................................16-35
e O
Summary........................................................................................................................................................16-36
Implement Receipts .........................................................................................................................................17-1
U s
Implement Receipts .......................................................................................................................................17-2
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................17-3
I
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................17-4
Overview of Receipt Setup............................................................................................................................17-5
A
Receipt Class, Payment Method, and Bank Account Relationship ...............................................................17-6
O
Defining Banks..............................................................................................................................................17-7
Defining Bank Accounts ...............................................................................................................................17-8
d
Guided Demostration - Define Banks........................................................................................................17-9
a n
Practice - Define Banks .............................................................................................................................17-10
Solution - Define Banks ............................................................................................................................17-11
a l
Defining Receipt Classes...............................................................................................................................17-13
Associating a Bank Account With a Payment Method..................................................................................17-15
r n
Guided Demonstration - Define Receipt Classes ......................................................................................17-16
t e
Defining Receipt Sources ..............................................................................................................................17-18
Types of Receivables Activities ....................................................................................................................17-19
In
Receivables Activity Setup............................................................................................................................17-21
Receivables Activities Example ....................................................................................................................17-23
e
Receivables Activities Comparison ...........................................................................................................17-24
c l
Guided Demonstration - Setup Receivable Activity..................................................................................17-26
Defining AutoCash Rules..............................................................................................................................17-27
r a
Defining Application Rule Sets.....................................................................................................................17-28
Setting Up Cross-Currency Receipts .............................................................................................................17-29
O System Options For Accounting....................................................................................................................17-30

Miscellaneous System Options Relating to Receipts.....................................................................................17-31

xii
Guided Demonstration - Setup Miscellaneous System Options ................................................................17-33
Profile Options ..............................................................................................................................................17-34
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................17-36
Implementation Considerations for Receipts.................................................................................................17-37
Other Implementation Considerations for Receipts.......................................................................................17-38
Function Security...........................................................................................................................................17-39
Summary........................................................................................................................................................17-40
Tax Accounting................................................................................................................................................18-1
Tax Accounting Process ................................................................................................................................18-2
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................18-3
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................18-4
Order Management Global Taxes Overview.................................................................................................18-5
Receivables Global Tax Overview ................................................................................................................18-6
Other Products ...............................................................................................................................................18-7
Global Tax Overview ....................................................................................................................................18-8
Tax Overview ................................................................................................................................................18-9
Value Added Tax Overview..........................................................................................................................18-10
US Sales Tax Overview.................................................................................................................................18-11
US Sales Tax Example ..................................................................................................................................18-12
Tax Partner Process Overview ......................................................................................................................18-13
Other Taxes in Oracle Applications ..............................................................................................................18-15
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................18-17
Tax Setup Steps .............................................................................................................................................18-18
Tax Setup Steps Continued ...........................................................................................................................18-19
Defining Tax Codes and Rates ......................................................................................................................18-20
Setting Up Inclusive and Exclusive Tax........................................................................................................18-21
Guided Demonstration - Define Tax Code................................................................................................18-22
Practice - Define Tax Codes ......................................................................................................................18-24
Solution - Define Tax Codes .....................................................................................................................18-25
n l y
O
Tax Groups Overview ...................................................................................................................................18-26
Setting Up Tax Groups (Optional) ................................................................................................................18-27
e
Compound Tax Example ...............................................................................................................................18-28
U s
Inclusive Tax with Compounding Example ..................................................................................................18-29
Defining Condition Sets ................................................................................................................................18-30
I
Guided Demonstration - Define Tax Group ..............................................................................................18-31
Practice - Create a Tax Group ...................................................................................................................18-32
A
Solution - Create a Tax Group...................................................................................................................18-33
O
Select a Tax Control Method.........................................................................................................................18-35
Setting Up Account Method (Optional) ........................................................................................................18-37
d
Assigning Tax Codes to Items.......................................................................................................................18-38
a n
Defining Tax Preferences, Defaults, and Rules.............................................................................................18-39
Guided Demonstration - Explain Tax System Options .............................................................................18-40
a l
Defining Tax Exemptions..............................................................................................................................18-43
Guided Demonstration - Define Tax Exemptions .....................................................................................18-44
r n
Defining Transaction Types ..........................................................................................................................18-45
t e
Defining AutoAccounting for Tax ................................................................................................................18-46
Guided Demonstration - Define Tax AutoAccounting..............................................................................18-47
In
Enabling Calculation of Tax on Freight ........................................................................................................18-48
Defining Tax Profile Options ........................................................................................................................18-49
e
For Order Management Profile Options ........................................................................................................18-50
c l
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................18-51
Tax Accounting Overview ............................................................................................................................18-52
r a
Setting Up Tax Accounting for Deferred Tax ...............................................................................................18-53
Guided Demonstration - Define Deferred Tax ..........................................................................................18-54
O Practice - Deferred Tax Codes...................................................................................................................18-55

Solution - Deferred Tax Codes..................................................................................................................18-56

xiii
Defining Receivables Activities ....................................................................................................................18-58
Guided Demonstration - Define Tax Receivables Activities.....................................................................18-59
Changing Tax Transactions ...........................................................................................................................18-60
Adjusting Tax on Invoices.............................................................................................................................18-61
Tax Credit Memo ..........................................................................................................................................18-63
Guided Demonstration - Enter a Tax Adjustment .....................................................................................18-64
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................18-65
Tax Reporting Ledger Overview...................................................................................................................18-66
Tax Extract Overview....................................................................................................................................18-67
Sources of Data .............................................................................................................................................18-68
Tax Ledger Reporting Options ......................................................................................................................18-69
Matrix Reporting ...........................................................................................................................................18-70
RXi Report Steps...........................................................................................................................................18-71
Modifying Attribute Sets ...............................................................................................................................18-72
Defining Summary Details ............................................................................................................................18-74
Publish RXi Reports ......................................................................................................................................18-75
Guided Demonstration - Define Tax Register ...........................................................................................18-76
Guided Demonstration - Run Tax Register ...............................................................................................18-78
Managing Access to RXi Reports and Attribute Sets....................................................................................18-79
Summary........................................................................................................................................................18-80
Period Closing Process ....................................................................................................................................19-1
Period Closing Process ..................................................................................................................................19-2
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................19-3
Period Closing Process ..................................................................................................................................19-4
Overview of Ordering to Period Closing.......................................................................................................19-5
Standard Reports ...........................................................................................................................................19-6
Reconciling Inventory Transactions..............................................................................................................19-7
Reconciling Receivables Transactions, Receipts, and Customer Balances ...................................................19-8
Running Revenue Recognition......................................................................................................................19-10
n l y
O
Transferring to the General Ledger ...............................................................................................................19-11
Running the Journal Import Program ............................................................................................................19-13
Guided Demonstration - Running the General Ledger Interface...............................................................19-14
e
U s
Mapping Receivables Transactions to General Ledger Categories ...............................................................19-15
Summary........................................................................................................................................................19-16
A I
Overview of Oracle Cash Management.........................................................................................................20-1
Overview of Oracle Cash Management.........................................................................................................20-2
O
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................20-3
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................20-4
d
a n
Order Lifecycle..............................................................................................................................................20-6
Cash Management Integration.......................................................................................................................20-7
a l
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................20-8
Functions with Receivables ...........................................................................................................................20-9
r n
Reconciliation Process...................................................................................................................................20-10
Load Bank Statements ...................................................................................................................................20-11
t e
Bank Reconciliation Overview......................................................................................................................20-12
In
Agenda...........................................................................................................................................................20-13
Cash Forecasting Functions...........................................................................................................................20-14
Steps in Cash Forecasting..............................................................................................................................20-15
l e
Cash Forecast Template.................................................................................................................................20-16
c
Cash Forecasting Sources..............................................................................................................................20-17
a
Summary........................................................................................................................................................20-18
r
O

xiv
Preface
Profile
Before You Begin This Course
Before you begin this course, you should have the following qualifications:
• Knowledge of the overall Order Entry to Bank Reconciliation processes
• Ability to navigate in Oracle Applications
Prerequisites
• R11i Navigating Oracle Applications
How This Course Is Organized
11i Order To Cash Fundamentals is an instructor-led course featuring lecture and hands-on
exercises. Online demonstrations and written practice sessions reinforce the concepts and skills
introduced.
Related Publications
Oracle Publications n l y
Title
e O
Part Number
Oracle Cash Management User Guide

U s
A80839-01
Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

A I A80828-01
Oracle Receivables User Guide

d O A80838-02
Oracle CRL-Financials Implementation Guide

an A83615-01
Oracle Order Management User's Guide
n al A88765_01
te r
Oracle Order Management Suite Implementation Manual A90142_01
n
Oracle Order Management Suite APIs and Open Interfaces ManualA88868_01
I
c l e
Oracle Pricing User's Guide A88825_01
r a
Oracle Shipping Execution User's Guide A77030-02
O
Oracle Applications System Administrator's Guide A75396-08

xv
Additional Publications
• System release bulletins
• Installation and user’s guides
• read.me files
• Oracle Magazine
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

xvi
Typographic Conventions
Typographic Conventions in Text
Convention Element Example
Bold italic Glossary term (if The algorithm inserts the new key.
there is a glossary)
Caps and Buttons, Click the Executable button.

lowercase check boxes, Select the Can’t Delete Card check box.
triggers, Assign a When-Validate-Item trigger to the ORD block.
windows Open the Master Schedule window.
Courier new, Code output, Code output: debug.set (‘I”, 300);

case sensitive directory names, Directory: bin (DOS), $FMHOME (UNIX)
(default is filenames, Filename: Locate the init.ora file.
lowercase) passwords, Password: User tiger as your password.
pathnames, Pathname: Open c:\my_docs\projects
URLs, URL: Go to http://www.oracle.com
user input,
User input: Enter 300
usernames
Username: Log on as scott
Initial cap Graphics labels

(unless the term is a
Customer address (but Oracle Payables)
n l y
Italic
proper noun)
Emphasized words Do not save changes to the database.

e O
and phrases,
titles of books and Reference Manual.
U s
For further information, see Oracle7 Server SQL Language
courses,
variables name of the user.
A I
Enter user_id@us.oracle.com, where user_id is the
Quotation
marks
Interface elements
with long names
that have only
d O
Select “Include a reusable module component” and click Finish.
This subject is covered in Unit II, Lesson 3, “Working with

initial caps;
lesson and chapter
Objects.”
a n
titles in cross-
a l
Uppercase
references
SQL column
r n Use the SELECT command to view information stored in the
t e
names, commands, LAST_NAME
In
functions, schemas, column of the EMP table.
table names
Arrow
Brackets
c l e
Menu paths
Key names
Select File > Save.
Press [Enter].
r a
Commas Key sequences Press and release keys one at a time:
[Alternate], [F], [D]
O
Plus signs Key combinations Press and hold these keys simultaneously: [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Del]

xvii
Typographic Conventions in Code
Convention Element Example
Caps and Oracle Forms When-Validate-Item
lowercase triggers
Lowercase Column names, SELECT last_name
table names FROM s_emp;
Passwords DROP USER scott

IDENTIFIED BY tiger;
PL/SQL objects OG_ACTIVATE_LAYER
(OG_GET_LAYER (‘prod_pie_layer’))
Lowercase Syntax variables CREATE ROLE role

italic
Uppercase SQL commands and SELECT userid
functions FROM emp;
Typographic Conventions in Navigation Paths

This course uses simplified navigation paths, such as the following example, to direct you
through Oracle Applications.
(N) Invoice > Entry > Invoice Batches Summary (M) Query > Find (B) Approve
n l y
This simplified path translates to the following:
1. (N) From the Navigator window, select Invoice then Entry then Invoice Batches
e O
Summary.
U s
2. (M) From the menu, select Query then Find.
A I
3. (B) Click the Approve button.
Notations:
d O
a n
(N) = Navigator
a l
(M) = Menu
r n
(T) = Tab
t e
(B) = Button
e In
c l
(I) = Icon
r a(H) = Hyperlink
O

xviii
Typographical Conventions in Help System Paths
This course uses a “navigation path” convention to represent actions you perform to find
pertinent information in the Oracle Applications Help System.
The following help navigation path, for example—
(Help) General Ledger > Journals > Enter Journals
—Represents the following sequence of actions:
1. In the navigation frame of the help system window, expand the General Ledger entry.
2. Under the General Ledger entry, expand Journals.
3. Under Journals, select Enter Journals.
4. Review the Enter Journals topic that appears in the document frame of the help system
window.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

xix
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Order To Cash Lifecycle Overview

xx
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 1
Basic Pricing
Basic Pricing
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 2
Objectives
Objectives
After completing this module, you should be able

to do the following:
• Understand the Pricing Engine
• Create Price Lists
• Maintain Price Lists
• Create Agreements
• Create Formulas
• Understand How to Use Qualifiers
• Create Modifiers
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 3
Agenda
Agenda
• Understanding the Pricing Engine

• Entering Price Lists
• Using Price List Maintenance
• Entering Agreements
• Entering Formulas
• Using Qualifiers
• Using Modifiers
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 4
Pricing Engine Overview
What is being Priced?
Who is asking for the Price?

Qualifiers
How should the Price be Adjusted?

Modifiers
n l y
e O
U s
The Pricing Engine answers three questions:
A I
• What is being priced
• Who is asking for the Price
d O
• How is the base unit price to be adjusted
a n
a l
Once it has all this information it selects the Price List Price and then applies any qualified
modifiers in order to calculate the final Selling Price.
WHAT?
r n
t e
Based on the seeded Item Context and any user defined Pricing attributes that have been setup:
Items.
e In
• The Item Context supported in Basic Pricing is the Item Number, Item Category, All
c l
• Using Pricing Attributes gives you the ability to factor in some characteristic about the
item that would affect the selling price. For example: height and length. You could set
r a up pricing attributes to represent height and length. When entering an Order the system
O will prompt for the height and length the customer is ordering and then the pricing engine
will use that information to calculate the unit selling price.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 5
WHO?
The Pricing Engine uses Qualifiers passed from the Sales Order to determine WHO is asking
for the Price. Then it uses the passed qualifiers to select which modifiers will be used to
calculate the final selling price.
Price List qualifiers are not enabled with basic pricing so the validation is based on the Item
value/unit of measure.
You can associate Qualifiers with Modifier Lists and Modifier Lines. These qualifiers act like
rules protecting your Modifiers from being used incorrectly. Oracle seeds four qualifier
contexts that you can use immediately. They are:
• Customer Context: Name, Bill-to, Ship-to, Customer Class, Sales Channel.
• Order Context: Order/Line Type, Customer PO, Agreement, Ship Date.
• Terms Context: Payment terms, Freight Terms.
• Modifier List Context: Price List.
• Volume Context: Order Amount, Line Volume
Note: These are not the only fields available with each context.
HOW?
Once the Pricing Engine has selected a unit price it determines HOW to adjust it by selecting
qualified Modifiers. Modifiers can be in the form of a Discount, Surcharge or Freight and
Special Handling.
• Discounts and Surcharges can be applied as a Percent, Amount, New Price or Lump sum
to the unit price.
• Freight and Special Charges are not used in the calculation of the Unit Price. These
n l y
values are stored separately and added to the Line and Order totals.
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 6
Pricing Engine Pyramid

INPUT All Customers, All Items OUTPUT
Base Price:
What Agreements Final
Item Number Price Lists Selling Price
Pricing Attributes • Formulas
Who How to Adjust Base Price

Qualifiers • Modifiers (Adjust - & +)
• Percent
• Amount
• New Price
• Lump sum
One Customer
• Price Breaks
• Formulas
One Item
n l y
Pricing Request Structure
e O
U s
A I
The Pricing Engine Pyramid demonstrates the flexibility you have in setting up your prices. At
have 1 price for all items for all customers.

d O
one extreme you could have 1 price per item per customer. And at the other extreme you could
a n
The Input information comes from the Order which is being priced. It is made up of Item
Number, pricing attributes and qualifiers. The Input information is used to generate the Pricing
l
Request Structure that must be filled by the Pricing Engine.
a
r n
The Base Price always comes off either a regular Price List or an Agreement Price List. The
value that is used could be the result of a price break, or a formula. The Pricing engine selects
t e
qualified modifiers and resolves incompatibilities. The Pricing engine applies modifiers to base
application.
e In
price to calculate the final selling price. This is returned as the Output to the calling
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 7
Agenda
Agenda

• Using Modifiers
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 8
Price List Creation
Price List Creation
Three ways to create a Price List
• Price List Setup User Interface
Items • Add Items from Inventory

Data base
• Copy Existing Price Lists
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 9
Price List Header
Price List Header
Name: Fiscal Year 2002
Currency
Round to: -2
Secondary Price List

n l y
e O
U s
Price List Header
Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)
A I
(N) Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup
d O
The Pricing Engine requires that all Items, Services, Models, Option Classes and Options be on
a price list.
a n
a l
You will need to set up a price list for each Currency you use. The Pricing Engine will only
consider price lists that share the same currency as the Pricing Request. Therefore a sales order
n
placed in Yen will have to utilize a Yen based price list.
r
t e
There is a Round to field in Price List form. This field controls the rounding factor. Entering a
positive number affects positions to the left of the decimal. Entering a negative number affects
e In
positions to the right of the decimal. Example –2 would round to the nearest cent. The number
of positions is controlled by the Profile Option
c l
QP: UNIT_PRICE_PRECISION_TYPE.
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 10
Secondary Price Lists
As with other areas of pricing, the Basic Pricing license controls available functionality to the
user. Basic Pricing allows one Secondary price list. A secondary price list allows the pricing
engine to look at more that one price list to determine the value of the sales order line. The
Pricing engine will look to the Secondary Price list if the requesting item and unit of measure is
not on the Primary Price list. A secondary price list is a price list you have defined previously.
Any price list has the ability to be used as a secondary price list.
Price Lists and Sales Order Defaults
Fields such as Payment Terms, Freight Terms and Freight Carrier are available on the Price
List form. By defining the Order Management Defaulting Rules to use these fields from the
Price List form, you are able to default values directly into the Sales Order based upon which
price list has been selected for the order. For more information on Defaulting Rules see the
Order Management User’s Guide.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 11
Guided Demonstration – Price List Header
Responsibility: Order Management Super User, Vision Operations
(USA)
(N) > Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup
1. Enter a price list name in Name.
2. To inactivate the price list clear Active.
3. Enter a description of the price list in Description.
4. Enter the price list currency in Currency.
5. Enter a rounding factor to be applied to the price list in Round To.
6. A positive number indicates number of places to the left of the decimal point; a negative
number indicates number of places to the right of the decimal point. The default is -2.
7. The pricing engine rounds the base price and all discount amounts before using them in
calculations.
8. The value returned depends on the value that you have set for the profile option
QP_UNIT_PRICE_PRECISION_TYPE: n l y
− Standard: The rounding factor defaults to the currency's precision value. You can
override the rounding factor to any value greater than or equal to the currency's
e O
precision value.
− Extended: The rounding factor defaults to the currency's extended precision value.U s
currency's extended precision value. A I
You can override the rounding factor to any value greater than or equal to the
d O
11. Enter the starting and ending effectivity dates of this price list in Effective Dates.
12. The Start Date defaults to the current date.

a n
a l
13. Enter a default payment term, in Payment Terms.
r n
e
14. Enter default freight terms in Freight Terms.
t
In
15. Enter default carrier in Freight Carrier.
− Note: The default payment terms, freight terms and freight carrier can be used by
e
l
the Defaulting Rules to default values onto a new sales order.
c
r a
17. Enter a comment in Comments.
O
18. Click on the Secondary Price List tab.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 12
19. Select Corporate from the LOV.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 13
Price List Line
Price List Line

• Enter a line for each Item and unit of
measure combination you sell
• Optionally enter one line with the Item’s

Primary UOM selected
• When the Primary UOM is selected

Inventory’s Unit of Measure conversions will
be used by the Pricing Engine
Product Attribute Product Value UOM Primary Value

Item Number BB-2100 Each $ 6.00
Item Number BB-2100 Dozen 66.00
Item Number BB-2200 Each 6.00
n l y
e O
U s
Price List Line
A I
(N) Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup (T) List Line
d O
The Product Attribute gives you the ability to enter one price per Item number, one price per
a n
Item Category, or one price for All Items. If you have entered all three prices on a Price List
the Pricing Engine will always select the Item Number’s price over the Item Category’s and the
Item Category’s over All Items.
a l
r n
The List line UOM is a required element of the validation process. The Pricing request is for
an Item/UOM and only price lists that have the same item and unit of measure will be
considered.
t e
e In
• You can have the same item on the same price list if they have different units of
measures. If your selling prices vary depending on the unit of measure this is how you
l
will want to set up your price lists.
c
r a
• Example: Price List setup: BB-2100 at $6.00 each, and BB-2100 at $66.00 a Dozen.
• Sales Order request: BB-2100 1 dozen. Result: $66.00 unit price.
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 14
If you sell products in multiple units of measure because of the convenience of packaging and
not because of a price break you will want to use the Primary UOM feature. This will enable
you to enter one price list line that can be used to sell in any UOM conversion that has been set
up in Inventory.
• If you have the Primary UOM checked and you enter an item/unit of measure
combination on a Sales Order that is not on a Price list the Pricing engine converts the
unit of measure on the order to the Item’s primary UOM and then uses the UOM
conversions to calculate the unit price.
• Example: Price List setup: BB-2200, $6.00 each, Primary UOM is selected. Sales
Order request: BB-2200 1 dozen. Result: 12*6.00 = $72.00 unit price.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 15
Price List Line Values
Price List Line Values
• Absolute values
• Percentages of other prices
• Static Formulas
• Positive or Negative values
• Effective dates
–Start date
–End date
n l y
e O
U s
List Line – List Line Values
A I
You can enter an absolute value which represents the unit price of your List line item.
d O
For Service Program Items you have a choice of pricing methods. You can enter an absolute
value which represent the unit price of your Service Program or you can enter a Percentage
a n
value which represents the Percentage of other item’s price. When you are selling a Service
program on a Sales Order you are prompted for the Item which the Service Program will cover.
a l
The pricing engine finds the price of the covered item and calculates the price of the service
program by multiplying the Percent times the item’s unit price. It then takes that amount times
r n
the duration of the coverage. Example of Percent of other price:
Price List setup:
t e
e In
• Service Program’s item number is set up at 10% per year.
• Sales Order request: Customer purchases 1 year’s worth of coverage for an Item which
l
sells for 1200.00.
c
r a
• The Pricing engine calculates .10 * 1200 * 1 (year) = 120.00.
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 16
Formulas can be used to if you need an algebraic expression to calculate the selling price.
Basic pricing will support entering a formula name in the Static Formula field. Static Formulas
require that a concurrent program, Update Formula Prices, be run to populate the List Price
value prior to being used by the Pricing Engine.
The Price list will support both Positive and Negative values. This enables you to create an
Item which represent a re-stocking fee. Enter this item on your price list with a negative value,
then enter this item on your Return order. When the Pricing Engine calculates the total value of
the Return it will subtract the Restocking fee thus lowering the value of the Credit Memo.
Start and End dates are respected by the Pricing engine.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 17
Guided Demonstration – Price List Line
(USA)
(N) > Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup > (T) List Lines
1. Click on the List Lines tab.
Note: Perform the remainder of the steps for each price list line that you want to create.
2. Select Item in Product Context.
3. In Product Attribute, select a segment in the item context of the Pricing Context descriptive
flexfield, for example, Item, Item Category, or All Items.
Note: Use “All Items” to define a modifier that applies to all items in your product
hierarchy. Use Item to define pricing for individual item numbers. Use Item Category to
define pricing for item categories.
4. Enter a Product value that is appropriate for the Product Attribute field.
5.
6.
You can use AS54888, AS54999, AS72111.
The unit of measure defaults from the item master of the validation organization. You can n l y
change it to any valid unit of measure for that item.
e O
7. Select Primary UOM if this price list line unit of measure is the primary pricing unit of
measure for the item.
U s
8.
A I
The pricing engine uses the primary pricing unit of measure and the Oracle Inventory unit of
price list line.

d O
measure conversion information to price an order whose unit of measure does not have a
a n
For example, a price list has two price list lines for item A11111, one with unit of measure
a l
EA--the primary UOM--and one for boxes. When the pricing engine receives an order in
unit of measure CS, it accesses the unit of measure conversion tables to convert CS to EA.
9. r n
Select Line Type of Price List Line.
t e
In
10. Select Application Method as follows:
e
l
11. Unit Price for inventory items and item categories
c
a
12. Either Unit Price or Percent Price for service items
r
O
13. Enter a value in the Static Formula field.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 18
Note: If you enter a static formula, run a concurrent process to calculate the value. The result
of the calculation changes the value of Value.
14. Enter the starting and ending effectivity dates of this price list line in Start Date and End
Date. The dates should be within the start and end effectivity dates of the price list.
15. Save your work.
Test your price list.
16. (N) > Orders, Returns > Sales Order.
17. Enter a customer name or number
18. You can use Business World 1608.
19. Select your new price list from the LOV.
20. Enter all required fields on the order header.
21. Click on the Line Items tab.
22. Enter an Item number that is on your price list.
23. Enter an Item that is not on your price list.

− You can use AS54888.
n l y
24. The Pricing Engine automatically populates the values fields.
e O
25. Enter another line for an item that is not on your new price list.
− You can use CM13139.
U s
26. Scroll to the Pricing tab.
A I
d O
27. The pricing engine changed the Price List to Corporate, which is the secondary price list on
your new price list.
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 19
Price List Mapping for Basic Pricing
Price List Secondary

List Lines Line Type Application Formula
method
Pricing Price List Unit

Attributes Line Price Static
Percent
n l y
e O
U s
A I
Basic Pricing supports one Pricing Attributes context per Price List Line with up to 100
attributes.
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 20
Practice - Create Price List
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to create a Price List.
• Enter Price List Header
• Enter Price List Lines
• Enter Sales Order to test new price list.
Assumptions
• “XX” is your initials.
• iSupport 11.5.3 has been installed along with other dependencies and patches.
• The URL s for accessing the HTML login page and apps login page.
• Seeded Vision Data
• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.
n l y
Tasks
e O
1. Login to the database.
U s
2. Choose the responsibility Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)
A I
3. Create a Price List header.
d O
4. Enter four Inventory Items and their unit prices.
a n
5.
l
Enter a line for a Service Item. Charge 5 percent of the Covered Item’s selling price per
year.
a
r n
6.
e
Enter a line with a value for a category of items.
t
7.
In
Enter a Sales Order using your “XX” price list.
e
8.
l
Enter an order line.
c
9.
r aAdd three more lines.
O
10. Your customer wants to buy an Extended 6 year Service program to cover their new laptop.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 21
Solution - Create Price List
Login
• User Name: operations
• Password: welcome
Choose Responsibility
Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA) Responsibility is selected.
Create Price List Header
2. (N) > Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup
− Enter a Price List name: XX-Base Prices.
− Enter a description. Corporate Base Prices.
− Active:
− Enter a currency: USD
−
−
Round to: -2.
Accept default Effective Dates.
n l y
Enter Inventory Items
e O
3. Common values for all 4 lines:
− Product Context: Item
U s
− Product Attribute:
− Line Type:
Item Number
Price List line
A I
4.
− Application Method:
Enter these values:

Unit Price
d O
a n
l
na
Product Value UOM Primary UOM Vaues
AS54888
AS54999
Ea
Ea
t e r 1500
1700
AS18947 I n
Ea 1800
AS72111
cl e DZ 2208
5.r a Save .
O
Enter Line
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 22
6. Insert a new line .

− Product Attribute: Item Number
− Product Value: WR18533
− UOM: YR
− Primary UOM:
− Line Type: Price List Line
− Application Method: Percent Price
− Value: 2
Enter Line with a Value
7. Insert a new line .

− Product Attribute: Item Category
− Product Value: COMPUTER.NOTEBOOK
− UOM: Ea
− Primary UOM:
− Line Type: Price List Line
− Application Method: Unit Price
− Value:
− Accept defaulted date
2000
n l y
8. Save .
e O
Enter a Sales Order
U s
9. (N) > Orders, Returns > Sales Order
− Customer Name: Business World (1608) A I
− Customer PO: XX-011
− Select your XX-Base Prices from the Price List LOV
d O
− Populate all required Order header fields
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 23
Enter an Order Line
10. Click in (T) Line Items.

− (Line 1.1) Item: AS18947.
− Quantity:
− UOM:
1
DZ n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
11. Change the UOM to EA.
a l
Add More Lines
r n
12. New line .
t e
In
13. Enter the following Item, Qty and UOM.
e
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 24
Questions:
• Why did the pricing engine allow you to order 1 dozen AS72111?
• Why did the pricing engine allow you to order 1 dozen AS54888?
• AS92689 is not on the XX price list, where did the pricing engine get the unit price?
Answers:
• Because AS72111 is on your price list with a unit of measure of dozen the pricing
engine pulled the price off of the price list.
• Because the “Primary UOM” is checked for AS54888, the pricing engine used the
inventory unit of measure conversions. Example: 1500 (Ea. price) * 12 (12 eachs in a
dozen) = 18,000.
• Because AS92689 belongs to the inventory category “COMPUTER.NOTEBOOK” the

n l y
pricing engine used the Category price of 2000.
Purchase an Extended 6 year Service program

e O
14. Add a new line . U s
− (Line 5.1) Item: WR18533
− Quantity: 1 A I
15. Click on (T) Services.
d O
− Service Reference type:
− Service Order type:
a n Order
Mixed
− Service Ref Order Number:
a l (the current order)
− Service Ref Line Number:
r n
− Service Ref Shipment number:
4
1
t e
− Tab to Service Duration: 6
e In
− Service Period: Year
16. Save
c.l
r a
O Question:
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 25
• Can you explain why the line number changed from 5.1 to 4.1…1?
• Can you explain the 600.00 Unit Price that was calculated?
Answers:
• The fifth line number digit represents a Service. By looking at the line number you can
see that line 4.1...1 is a service which is covering line number 4 shipment schedule 1.
• The warranty sells for 5% of the covered product (2000) per year. Since the customer
ordered 6 years the calculation is .05 * 2000 * 6 = 600.00.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 26
Add Items to Price List
•
Item Category = Shippable
OR
Fiscal 2002
Effective 1 Jan 02 – 31 Dec 02
Item Status = Active n l y

e O
U s
A I
(N) Pricing > Price Lists > Add Items to Price List
O
The Add Items to Price List program allows you to quickly add items to an existing price list.
d
This facilitates the quick creation of new price list by eliminating the need to add individual
lines to the price list.
a n
a l
When using the Add Items to Price list functionality you are able to use a number of control
attributes within the form to identify which items should be added to the list. These options
r n
include addition by the range of item numbers, item category and item status. One element
t e
you should note is that you can only add items from this form to one list at a time. This means
that if you would like to add all of the items that have a category of Shippable to five different
e In
price lists, you must initiate the program from this form using five separate submissions, each
time identifying the price list you wish to add the items to.
c l
Using the Set Price Equal to Cost option, you are able to pull the current cost of the item from
r a
inventory into the price list when you are adding that item to the price list. Select the Inventory
Organization you want to Add Items from. Be sure to enter an Organization that stores Item
Ocosts.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 27
Guided Demonstration - Add Items to New Price List
(USA)
1. Enter a Price List name.
2. Enter a Description.
3. Enter a future Effectivity date.
4. Accept all other defaults.
5. Save your work.
6. (N) > Pricing > Price Lists > Add Items to Price List.
7. Select the new price list from the LOV.
8. Optionally, enter a range of Item number to restrict the items that can be added.
9. Select a Category Set and Category, or accept defaults.

n l y
10. If you want to add items from an item category, you first define the default inventory
category set for Order Management. When you add items from an item category, the process
e O
adds all items of the item category to the price list.
U s
11. Select an Item status such as Active.
12. Select the checkbox for add items at cost. A I

d O
13. You could then perform a Price list update by creation date to markup the items.
a n
14. If you selected to add items at cost be sure to select an Organization that has costs assigned
to their items.
a l
15. Click on the Submit button.
r n
t e
In
16. When the concurrent request has completed find your price list to see the results.
c l e
17. (N) > Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup.
a
18. Use the Flashlight to find the Price list that was updated.
r
O
19. If the item has a zero unit price, it is because the item had no costs associated with it in
Inventory.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 28
Copy Price List
Copy Price List
• •
Copy
Fiscal 2002
Effective 1 Jan 02 – 31 Dec 02 Fiscal 2003
Effective 1 Jan 03 – 31 Dec 03
Mouse Pad
Currency Unit = 10 Mouse Pad
Currency Unit = 10
Desktop Computer
Currency Unit = 350 Desktop Computer
Currency Unit = 350
n l y
e O
U s
Copy Price List
A I
(N) > Pricing > Price Lists > Copy Price List
d O
Copying a Price List allows you to quickly create a new price list without adding lines
a n
manually to the price list. You are able to utilize controls within the Copy Price List form to
determine which line items will be copied during the concurrent process.
a l
One option is to include the copying of discounts (modifiers) when copying an existing price
r n
list. This option will create new Modifiers for each existing Modifier that has the original Price
List as either a Modifier List Qualifier or a Modifier Line Qualifier. The new modifier’s name
t e
will be a concatenation of the original Modifier plus a sequence number and will have the new
e In
Price List as a Modifier List Qualifier.
When creating the new price list you are able to specify any applicable effective dates. As the
l
Pricing Engine will not use the new Price List until it’s Effective Date, this will allow you to
c
a
create price lists in advance of when they will be needed within the pricing environment.
r
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 29
Guided Demonstration – Create a Price List
(USA)
(N) > Pricing > Price Lists > Copy Price List
1. Tab to the Copy From region.
2. Select the price list you want to copy. The price list can be either type Standard (PRL) or
type Agreement (AGR). Currency and Description display.
3. Enter a range of items to add.
4. You cannot use wild cards when you specify the beginning and ending item numbers.
5. Select an item category and item category set to limit the items to add. When you add items
from an item category, the process adds all items of the item category to the price list; it
does not add the item category.
6. You must enter both Item Category Set and Item Category for this criterion to be effective.
7.
8.
Select Include Discounts to instruct the process to copy discounts.
n l
Select “Retain Effective Dates” to instruct the process to copy the effective dates of price list
y
lines. If selected Price List Lines that no longer have a current effective date will not be
copied to the new price list.
e O
9. Move to the Copy to region.
U s
10. Enter the Name of the new price list.
A I
11. Enter the Description of the new price list.
d O
12. Enter the Effective Dates of the new price list.
a n
a l
13. Click Submit. The request ID is displayed in the Request ID field.
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 30
Practice - Copy Price List
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to create a new Price List by copying an existing price list.
Assumptions
Tasks
n l y
3. Copy the Corporate price list.
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 31
Solution - Copy Price List
Login to the database

− User Name: operations
− Password: welcome
Select Responsibility
2. Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA) Responsibility is selected.
Copy Price List
− Corporate
4. Retain Effective Date.

− XX-New Corporate
5. Enter a Description.
− 2 months from to day
6. Click on (B) Submit.

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 32
• Write your concurrent Request ID: ________________________________.
n l y
7. Click on (M) View > Requests > (B) Find (all requests).
e O
8. Verify that the concurrent has completed normally. Then verify that a new price list was
created.
U s
A I
10. Use the flashlight to Find XX-New Corporate price list.
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 33
Agenda
Agenda

• Using Modifiers
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 34
Price List Maintenance - Overview
Price List Maintenance - Overview

Flexible Maintenance Features
• Manually Update
• Adjust Price List Process
• Add Items to Price List

Items
Data base
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 35
Manual Price List Updates
Use Effective Start/End Dates to

Maintain Pricing History
Corporate Price List for 2002

Item Start End
Number UOM Date Date Value
BB-1000 Each 01-JAN-2002 30-JUN-2002 200
BB-1000 Each 01-JUL-2002 220
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup (T) List Line
O
To change existing Price Lists manually Navigate to the Price List Setup form and Find the
Price list that needs maintenance. d
Elements you are able to update:
a n
a l
• You can add or change the Secondary Price List.
• You can Add New List Lines to existing Price Lists.
r n
• You can Change List Line Values. Be aware that if you key over the existing Value you
e
have lost the ability to maintain a history of your previous price.
t
In
• The only way to keep a Pricing History is by manually entering an End Date on the List
Line Value that is being discontinued, then add a new line with the same Item Number
l e
and unit of measure but with the new Value. The new List Line’s Start Date must be
c
greater then the End Date of the original line.
r a
• The Pricing Engine always validates the Price List and List Line’s Effective Dates.
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 36
Guided Demonstration – Manual Price List Update
(USA)
1. Use the flashlight to find the price list to update.
2. On the header you can change any of the default information, freight carrier, freight terms,
and payment terms.
3. Enter an “Effective to date” to signal the pricing engine when to no longer use the price list.
4. Click on the List Line tab.
5. In order to maintain a history of an item’s selling price it is necessary to put an end date on
the current price and enter a new line for the same item/uom combination with a date in the
future.
6. Click on the List Lines tab.
7.
8.
Scroll to the right to put an End date for a price list line.
Save your work. n l y

9. Insert a new List line with the same item and uom with a starting date greater than the end
e O
date.
U s
10. Save your work.
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 37
Practice - Manual Price List Update
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to manually update a Price List.
• Find an existing Price List
• Enter and end date for current price
• Add a new line with a future effective date
• Change the Value of an existing line.
Assumptions

n l y
e O
Tasks
U s
A I
2.
O
Choose the responsibility Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA).
d
3.
n
Put an end date on a current list line. Add a new line for the same item/uom with a future
a
start date. This preserves the pricing history of an item.
4.
a l
Change a selling price without maintaining history.
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 38
Solution - Manual Price List Update
End Date List Line
4. Use the Flashlight to select XX-Base Prices.
5. Click on (T) List Lines.

− F11
− AS18947
− Ctrl F11
− Last day of this month n l y
e O
6. Save .
U s
7. Insert a new line
− Item
− Item Number
.
A I
− AS18947
− Ea d O
− Price List Line
a n
8. Application Method: Unit Price.
a l
− 1820
r n
t e
In
9. Save .
Change Selling Price
c l e
r a
10. Query all rows: Ctrl F11.
O
11. Change Value for your AS54888 to 1550.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 39
12. Save .
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 40
Adjust Price List
Adjust Price List
Item Category
Creation Date
Increase 15%
Updated
Corporate Price List Corporate Price List
n l y
e O
U s
Adjust Price List
A I
(N) Pricing > Price Lists > Adjust Price List
d O
Use the Adjust Price List program to Mass Update your Price List Values. Be aware that using
a n
the Adjust Price List program to change values does not create a history record. You will not
be able to recapture the old price. If you need the ability to retrieve expired prices you do not
want to use Adjust Price List.
a l
Elements you are able to update:
r n
e
• Optionally adjust only a Range of Items.
t
In
• Optionally adjust only an Item Category. Many companies adjust their Items’ selling
prices annually or when the product cost has drastically changed. This is often done by
c l e
Product Family. If you set up an Item Category to represent the Product Family you can
quickly markup the a subset of Price List Lines.
r a
• Optionally adjust only Items with a specific Item Status.
• Any time a new line is added to a price (manually, copy or Add Items) the system
O populates the Creation Date with the system date.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 41
• Use the Creation Date to select only items that were added on a given date. This is very
helpful when you have used the Add Items to Price List program to add new items At
Cost. This enables you to markup the new items while leaving the older lines untouched.
• Adjust the Price List Value by a Percent or an Amount. This enables you to use the Copy
program to created as many price list as your business procedures support and then
Increase or Decrease as needed.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 42
Guided Demonstration – Adjust Price List
(USA)
(N) > Pricing > Price Lists > Adjust Price List
1. Use the Flashlight to select the price list you want to adjust. Currency and Description
display.
2. Enter a range of items to update. You cannot use wild cards when you specify the beginning
and ending item numbers.
3. Select an item category set and item category to limit items to adjust.
4. Enter an item status to limit the items to adjust.
5. Enter a creation date to limit the items to adjust. Pricing adjusts only the items added to the
price list on that date.
6. Select Percent or Amount for Adjust By, as follows:
7.
8.
Percent: The process increases or decreases Operand by a percentage.
Enter the percentage in the second field. n l y

9. Amount: The process increases or decreases Operand by a fixed amount.
e O
10. Enter the fixed amount in the second field.
U s
11. Click on the Submit button.
A I
12. The request ID is displayed in the Request ID field.
d O
n
13. View Requests to validate that the process has completed normally.
a
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 43
Practice - Adjust Price List
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to perform a mass adjustment of a price list.
Assumptions
Tasks
2. Choose the responsibility Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA).
n l y
3. Adjust the new corporate price list by 5% for all items.
e O
• N > Pricing > Price Lists > Adjust Price List
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 44
Solution - Adjust Price List
Login
Adjust Corporate Price List
2. (N) > Pricing > Price Lists > Adjust Price List
− Price List: XX-New Corporate.
− Adjust by: Percent.
− Value: 5.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O − Write your Request ID: ____________________________________.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 45
Validate that your concurrent request completed normally.
6. Use the flashlight to find XX-New Corporate.
7. Click on (T) List Lines.
Notice that the prices have been adjusted.
8. Close forms .
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 46
Add Items to Price List For Maintenance
Add Items to Price List For Maintenance
• Quick way to add new Product Lines

• Does not write over matching Item/UOMs
Seattle’s
New Fall-Line Items
n l y
e O
U s
Add Items to Price List for Maintenance
A I
(N) Pricing > Price Lists > Add Items to Price List
d O
Not only is the Add Items to Price List program great to create your first Price List, it is also a
a n
good tool to add Product Lines to existing price lists. When new product lines are added to
your inventory give them unique Categories so that you can quickly add them to your existing
l
Price Lists using the Add Items feature by Item Category.
a
r n
If you’re in an industry where your selling prices are set at a given Percent over cost add your
items at cost with a Future Effective Start date. Then use the Adjust Price List program to
markup the new items.
t e
e In
It is important to understand that the Add Items to Price List program does not write over any
List Lines that have the same Item Number and Unit of Measure as the Inventory Item Number
l
and it’s Primary unit of measure. This means that you can’t accidentally write over current
c
a
valid values.
r
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 47
Practice - Add Items to a Price List
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to add items from inventory to an existing price list. Then
using Adjust List price you will adjust your price list prices.
• Add items to a price list
• Adjust all items prices
• View the results of all processes
Assumptions
n l y
e O
Tasks
U s
1.
2.
Login to the database.
Choose the responsibility Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA). A I
3.
d O
Add Active Items from the Seattle organization to your XX-Base Price price list.
4.
a n
Mass adjust all items on your price list by 10 currency units.
5.
a
Look at your price list to see the changes. l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 48
Solution - Add Items to a Price List
Add Active Items
− XX-Base Prices.
− Item Status: Active.
4. Check Set List Price Equal to Cost .
5. Inventory Organization: Seattle Manufacturing.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a• Write your Concurrent Request ID. ________________________________.
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 49
8. Confirm that your request completed normally.
Mass Adjust
9. (N) > Pricing > Price Lists > Adjust Price List
− Price List: XX-Base Prices.
− Adjust by: 10
n l y
e O
U s
A I
• O
Write the Request ID: _____________________________________.
d
View Price List'
a n
l
a
12. Use the flashlight r n
to find XX-Base Prices.
t e
In
13. Click on the (T) List Lines.
e
l
14. Scroll to right to see the new prices.
c
r a
15. Close forms .
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 50
Agenda
Agenda

• Using Modifiers
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 51
Agreement Overview
Agreement Overview
• Generic
• Customer Specific
• Agreement Type
• Order Transaction Type Controls
• Default Values for Sales Order
• Revision History
• Standard Agreement
• Pricing Agreement
n l y
• Customer Item Numbers
e O
U s
Agreement Overview
Agreements
A I
d O
Agreements can be Generic or Customer Specific. If it is Generic than all customers are
eligible to use it. If it is Customer Specific then only the Customer Name entered on the
Agreement will be eligible.
a n
The Agreement Type has many, varied, functions. It can be used as a Qualifier for a Discount
l
(Modifier). It can be used by the Order Transaction Type to restrict a group of orders to only
a
reporting purposes.
r n
allow Agreements of a specified Type. It can be used to group similar agreements for
t e
Besides restricting which Agreements a Sales Order can use, the Order Transaction Type can
e In
also specify whether an Agreement is required in order to Book a Sales Order.
Many of the fields entered on your Agreements can be used to default the appropriate data on
l
to a new Sales Order/Line. Your agreement can default Customer PO, Freight Terms, Freight
c
r a
carrier, payment terms, Salesperson, Invoicing Rules and Accounting Rules.
By using the Revision number, Revision Date and Revision Reason you can maintain a history
Oof all the changes you make to your Agreements.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 52
You can setup 2 kinds of Agreements, Standard or Pricing:
• A Standard Agreement could have special Freight or Payment terms. You can associate
an already existing Price List to a Standard Agreement. Optionally, you can create
Discounts that are qualified by the Agreement Name or Agreement Type.
• A Pricing Agreement allows you to create a Price List as part of the Agreement setup.
The Agreement Price List has fields which are not on a regular Price List. These fields
allow you to optionally enter Customer Item Numbers which have been created in
Inventory and cross referenced to an Internal Item Number.
You can use an Agreement Number to reference a legal document that you have given your
customer.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 53
Agreement
Agreement
• Generic Standard Agreements
• Customer Specific Pricing Agreements
Agreement Standard
Price List
Agreement
Price List
n l y
e O
U s
Agreement
A I
(N) Pricing > Pricing Agreement
d O
If you do not enter a Customer you are creating a Generic Agreement.
n
Effective Dates are used by the Pricing Engine to assure that only Agreements that are
a
a l
currently in effect will be used. The Effective dates are also used by the Revision Control
logic. You cannot create a new revision unless the current revision has an Effective end date.
n
If you set the Price List Type to Agreement Price List you will have the ability to create a price
r
e
list as part of the Agreement setup.
t
In
If you set the Price List Type to Standard Price List you will be prompted to enter the name of
an existing Price List.
c l e
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 54
Guided Demonstration – Agreement Price List
(USA)
(N) > Pricing > Pricing Agreements
You can create two kinds of agreements, Pricing and Standard. Pricing agreement
allow you to add agreement lines to define the agreement prices. A Standard
agreement uses a standard price list and will not allow agreement lines.
1. In the Agreement tabbed region, enter an agreement name in Agreement Name.
2. Enter an agreement number in Agreement Number.
3. Enter a revision number in Revision
Note Information only: If you want to create a revision:
Change the ending effective date of the current revision to the appropriate date because
different revisions of the same agreement cannot have overlapping start or end dates.
You cannot create a revision for an agreement unless the current version has effectivity
dates. If the current revision does not have effectivity dates, add them now and save your
n l y
4.
work.
Clear the window.

e O
5. Enter the same agreement name, the same agreement number, and a new revision number as
U s
if you are creating a new agreement.
A I
6.
7. d O
Select a revision date in Revision Date. The revision date defaults to the current date.
Enter the customer name in Customer. The customer number displays in Cust Number. If
a n
you leave this field blank you are creating a generic agreement that can be used by all
customers.
a l
8.
n
Select an agreement type in Agreement Type.
r
9.
t e
Enter a contact in Contact.
In
10. Enter effectivity dates in Effective Dates. They effectivity period defaults from the current
e
l
date to two years from the current date.
c
a
11. Enter a salesperson name in Sales Person.
r
O
12. Enter the customer's purchase order number in Purchase Order.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 55
13. Enter the purchase order signature date in Signature Date.
14. Click on the Pricing tab.
15. Select the price list type in Price List Type:

− To create a standard agreement, choose Standard Price List
− To create a pricing agreement, choose Agreement Price List.
− For Standard Agreements: Choose from the list of values of existing standard price
lists. These price lists were created using the Price List Setup form. The Currency,
Rounding Factor, Description, and Comments fields will all default from the
standard price list. This information cannot be changed on the Agreements header
form.
− For Pricing Agreements: You can create a new price list name or choose from an
existing list of values of Pricing Agreement Price List.
Pricing agreement price list are maintained only via the Pricing Agreements Form.
− If creating a pricing agreement enter a currency in Currency.
− If creating a pricing agreement enter a rounding factor in Rounding Factor.
− If creating a pricing agreement enter a description for the price list in Description.
16. Enter a default freight carrier in Freight carrier.
17. Enter default freight terms in Freight Terms.

n l y
19. Click on the Payment tab.
e O
20. Select payment terms in Payment Terms.
U s
A I
When you enter a sales order in Oracle Order Management and you specify an agreement
that uses a Standard price list, the payment terms default from that price list. You change
these payment terms on the Price Lists form, Price List region.
d O
a n
When you enter a sales order in Oracle Order Management and you specify an agreement
that uses an Agreement price list, the payment terms default from those that you enter in this
field.
a l
21. Enter the bill-to:
r n
− name in Invoice To
t
− address in Address e
In
− contact in Invoice Contact
e
l
22. In the Payment tabbed region, Rules region, enter an accounting rule in Accounting Rule.
c
r a
23. Enter an invoicing rule in Invoicing.
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 56
24. To set the accounting rule override flag, in the Override Flag region, select Accounting
Rule.
25. To set the invoicing rule override flag, in the Override Flag region, select Invoicing Rule.
For Standard Agreements: The agreement line details will default from the Standard Price
List that was entered in the Price List field in the Pricing tab. These fields cannot be changed
or additional lines cannot be entered from the Agreement Lines. Changes and additional
price list lines must be made on the Price List from the Price List Set form.
If you attached an existing Pricing Agreement Price List, the agreement lines will be
defaulted from that Price List. You are able to make changes to the agreement line details,
and add additional agreement lines. Any changes or additions that you make will be
reflected on the other agreement lines that this price list is attached to.
If you are creating a Standard agreement you can save your work now and close forms.
Otherwise, continue with the remaining steps.
Note: You can price Customer Items that have been defined in Inventory or Internal Item
numbers.
26. In the lowest region of the form, enter a customer item number in Customer Item. Customer
item is a pricing attribute.
27. Enter a customer address in Address.

n l y
28. Entered a customer address category in Address Category.
e O
29. Enter an inventory item number in Product Value.
U s
A I
Note: You cannot enter an item category in Product Value. If you entered a customer item
which is associated with more that one inventory item, you must select the correct inventory
item for the agreement line.
30. Enter a unit of measure in UOM.

d O
a n
31. Select Primary UOM if this price list line unit of measure is the primary pricing unit of
a l
measure for the item. The pricing engine uses the primary pricing unit of measure and the
Oracle Inventory unit of measure conversion information to price an order whose unit of
r n
measure does not have a price list line. For example, a price list has two price list lines for
t e
item A11111, one with unit of measure EA, the primary UOM, and one for boxes. When the
In
pricing engine receives an order in unit of measure CS, it accesses the unit of measure
conversion tables to convert CS to EA.
c l e
32. Select Price List Line in Line Type.
r a
33. Select Unit Price for Application Method
O
34. Enter base price in Value.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 57
35. Enter the effectivity dates in Start Date and End Date. They should be within the effectivity
dates of the agreement.
37. Enter a revision number in Revision. This revision number is not dependent on the
agreement revision number.
38. Enter a revision reason in Revision Reason. You must create a list of reasons before you use
this field.
39. Enter the revision date in Revision Date.
40. Save your work.
41. Enter a Sales Order to test your work.
42. (N) > Orders, Returns > Sales Orders.
Note: Modify the order form to display the Agreement number
43. Put your cursor on the “Total” field.
44. Click on the Folder Tools icon.
45. Click on Show Fields.

n l y
46. Put your cursor on the Agreement field and click OK.
e O
Notice the Agreement number is displayed under the total field.
U s
47. Select your agreement name from the LOV.
A I
48. Click on the Line Items tab.
d O
Notice that the price list name is changed to the Agreement Price list name.
a n
l
49. Enter an Item that is on your Agreement price list.
a
n
Note that the price is retrieved from the Agreement price list.
r
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 58
Practice - Agreement Price List
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to create an Agreement Price List
• Create an Agreement header
• Create Agreement pricing lines
• Use the new Agreement price list
Assumptions
n l y
Tasks
e O
U s
A I
3. Create a customer agreement that has its own pricing lines.
d O
4. Enter a new Sales Order using your Agreement.
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 59
Solution - Agreement Price List
2. Select Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA) Responsibility.
Create a customer agreement that has its own pricing lines
(N) > Pricing > Price Agreements
3. Agreement Name: XX-Pricing Agreement.
4. Agreement Number: 1
5. Business World (1608).
6.
7.
Standard Terms and Conditions.
Select from LOV.

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
8. Click on (T) Pricing.
a l
r n
9. Agreement Price List.
− XX-AGREEMENT PL.t e
e
10. Enter a Description.In
c l
11. Accept defaults.
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 60
12. Click on (T) Payment.
13. Select Payment terms from the LOV.
14. Select Accounting Rule from the LOV.
15. Select Invoicing rule from the LOV.
16. Accept defaults.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
17. Click on in the Lines region.
d O
18. Enter a line for AS54888 unit price 1450.
a n
l
19. Enter a line for AS54999 with a unit price of 1500.
a
r n
t e
e In
20. Save
c.l
r a
Enter a new Sales Order using Agreement
O
(N) > Orders, Returns > Sales Orders > (T) Order Information
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 61
IMPORTANT: If you don’t see the Agreement field on the order header use steps 2 through
5 to add it. If it is already there go to step 7.
21. Put your cursor on the “Total” field.
22. Click on the Folder Tools icon.
23. Click on Show Fields.
24. Put your cursor on the Agreement field and click OK.
Notice the Agreement number is displayed under the total field.
25. Customer: Business World (1608).
26. XX-012.
27. XX-Pricing Agreement.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
Notice that the Price List was updated from the agreement.
28. Click on (T) Line Items.

a l
− AS54888
− 1 r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O The pricing engine uses the price from the Agreement price list.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 62
29. Close forms .
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 63
Agenda
Agenda

• Using Modifiers
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 64
Formula Overview
Formula Overview
• Arithmetic Expression
• Link a Static Formula to a Price List
• Run Update Formula Prices
• Link a Formula to a Freight and
Special Charges modifier
• Formula Types
• Use the Pricing Context which can have
up to 100 Pricing Attributes
n l y
e O
U s
Formula Overview
A I
The formula is an arithmetic expression made up of step numbers. Each Step number will be
defined in the Formula Lines region. You can repeat step numbers in the formula. Example: 1
* 2 + 3 – 1.
d O
Link your formula to a Price List by putting the Formula name in the Static Formula field on
n
the List Line that has the Item number(s) that are to get their prices derived from the formula
a
a l
(don’t enter a price, let the processing program calculate the price value).
You must run the Update Formula Prices after entered your Formula name in the Static
n
Formula field on the Price List. This concurrent request will use your formula to calculate the
r
Charge Modifier.
t e
price that will populate the List Line’s Value field. Link a formula to a Freight and Special
e In
With Basic Pricing you are restricted to three Formula Types, Numeric Constant, Pricing
Attribute and Factor List. Basic Pricing uses the seeded Pricing Context which has up to 100
l
Pricing attributes.
c
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 65
Basic Pricing Formula
• Name
• Effective Dates
• Formula
Mathematical Operators
Numeric Operands
PL/SQL
• Formula Type
Numeric Constant
Pricing Attribute
Factor List
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) Pricing > Pricing Formulas > Formulas Setup
When using the basic pricing formula:
d O
• The Name is a unique identifier.
a n
a l
• The Pricing Engine uses the Effective dates.
• Use the Formula field to enter your formula expression. Each numeric value entered
r n
must be defined using a Formula Type on the Formula Line tab. You can use
e
mathematical operators, numeric operands, and PL/SQL to create your formula
t
In
• The formula type Numeric Constant can be any numeric value. It can be a whole number
or a decimal number. (1 or .1)
l e
Pricing Attribute and Factor List are explained next, separately.
c
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 66
Pricing Attribute
Pricing Attribute
• Characteristic of an Item
Thickness, Height, Length
Age, Usage
Number of users
Level of service
• Absolute value of Pricing Attributes
Example
Formula = 1 x 2 Pricing Request
Step 1: Thickness: .3 Thickness: 0.3 mm
n l y
Step 2: Base price 100 Calculation: 1 x 2 = 0.3 x 100 = $30
e O
U s
Pricing Attributes
A I
Pricing attributes are characteristics of products and services that you can specify when the
O
characteristics help to determine the price of a product or service. Distance, age or usage,
number of users, and level of service are examples of pricing attributes.
d
a n
You can specify one or a combination of pricing attributes and assign them to a product or
service. The absolute value of a pricing attribute (such as thickness or height) of an item can be
used as a Step in the formula.
a l
Example:
r n
This formula would use a Constant Value and a Pricing attribute to calculate an item’s unit
price.
t e
e In
You sell glass plates that can vary in thickness. You want the price to vary depending on the
thickness. Create a formula 1* 2 to calculate the price of a glass item.
c l
• Step 1 is a pricing attribute for thickness
r a
• Step 2 is a numeric constant which represent the base value for the item.
Calculation: If 100 is the base price of the glass item and 0.3 is the value of the thickness
Oattribute of the glass then the pricing engine evaluates the formula as 0.3*100 which is 30.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 67
Factor List
Factor List
• Create a List of Values to be factored
Example: Skill Level Factor
Apprentice .85
Staff 1.0
Principal 1.5
• Create And and Or Conditions
Base Price Attribute lines are OR logic
Associate Pricing Attribute lines are AND logic
• Single value for a Pricing Attribute

Operator: =
• Range of values for a Pricing Attribute
Operator: BETWEEN
n l y
e O
U s
Factor List Formula Type
A I
Use Factor Lists to associate values and factors with a Pricing Attribute. The Pricing engine
correct Factor to use.

d O
compares the Values entered on a Sales Order to the values in the Factor List to select the
sales order price.

a n
For example you may need to factor in the Skill level of your Consultants when calculating the
a l
Base Price $100
r n
Skill Level Factor Results
t e
Apprentice .85 Markdown $ 85
In
Staff 1.0 Regular Price 100
Principal 1.5 Markup 150
c l e
The Formula’s Pricing Context must match the Pricing Context on the Price List Line that the
r a
formula is being attached to.
O You can create OR logic by the way you define your factor list. Each value that a Pricing
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 68
Attribute can have is entered as a Base Price Attribute line. Example of OR logic:
• Base Price Attribute Thickness = Value: 0.1 mm Factor: 1
• The pricing engine will retrieve a Factor if the customer orders a thickness of 0.1 mm
OR .2 mm.
You can create AND logic if you link an Associated Pricing Attribute line to the Base Price
Attribute line. Example of AND logic:
• Associate Pricing Attribute Length = Value: 0.5 mm.
The pricing engine will use the Factor 7 if the customer orders a thickness of 0.1 mm AND a
length of 0.5 mm.
You can assign a single value to the Pricing Attribute or a range of values by using the
Operator field. The Operator = (equal) is a single value. The Operator BETWEEN allows you
a range of values.
See Examples above to understand single value.
You can also use multiple values within factor lists. Example of multiple values:
• Base Price Attribute Thickness BETWEEN Value: 0.1 and .3 mm Factor: 3
• Base Price Attribute Thickness BETWEEN Value: 0.4 and .6 mm Factor: 6
• The Pricing Engine will use the Factor 6 if the customer orders a thickness of 0.5mm.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 69
Guided Demonstration – Pricing Formula
(USA)
(N) > Pricing > Pricing Formulas > Formula Setup
1. Enter a new pricing formula in Name.
2. Enter a description of the pricing formula in Description.
3. Enter the effective dates of the pricing formula in Effective Dates.
4. Enter the formula in Formula. The formula is an arithmetic expression made up of step
numbers that you enter in the Formula Lines tabbed region. You can repeat step numbers in
the formula.
Note: In the Formula Lines region, perform steps 6-9 for each component of the formula.
6. Select a value for Formula Type. (Basic pricing allows: Numeric Constant, Pricing
Attribute, and Factor List.)
7.
8.
Enter the following information depending on Formula Type:
Numeric Constant: Enter the numeric constant in Component. n l y

9.
e O
Pricing attribute: Select the pricing context in Pricing Attribute Context. Select the pricing
attribute name in Pricing Attribute.
U s
A I
10. Factor List: Select or enter the name of a factor list in Component. To use an existing factor
list, select it from the list of values. To create a new factor list, enter the name and the form
creates it.
d O
11. Enter the step number for the component. You cannot repeat step numbers in this region
a n
even though you can repeat step numbers in the formula.
12. Save your work.

a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 70
Agenda
Agenda

• Using Modifiers
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 71
Qualifier Overview
Qualifier Overview
• Use Qualifiers to create rules for your

Modifier Lists
Modifier Lines
• Group your Qualifiers using
And and Or logic.
Group # Context Attribute Operator Value

1 Customer Customer Name = BB Printing
1
2
Customer
Customer
Ship to Site
Customer Name
=
=
San Francisco
Paul’s Printing
n l y
2 Customer Ship to =
O
San Francisco
e
U s
Qualifier Overview
A I
Qualifiers are an intricate part of the pricing logic. Qualifiers create rules that Protect your
seeded qualifiers using AND and OR logic.

d O
Price Lists and Modifiers from being misused. To create your qualifier rules, group any of the
a n
• If the Group Numbers are the same it is AND logic.
• If the Group Numbers are different it is OR logic.
Example:
a l
Group # Context Attribute
r n Operator Value
1 Customer
t e Customer Name = BB Printing
In
1 Customer Ship to Site = San Francisco
2 Customer Customer Name = Paul’s Printing
2
c l e
Customer Ship to Site = San Francisco
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 72
Seeded Qualifier Contexts
Seeded Qualifier Contexts
MODIFIER LIST Qualifiers
“Context” “Qualifier Attribute”

Customer Customer Name, Bill to, Ship to, Class
Modifier List Price List
MODIFIER LINE Qualifiers
“Context”
Customer
“Qualifier Attribute”
Agreement Name, Agreement Type
n l y
Order Customer PO, Order Type
e O
U s
Seeded Qualifier Context
A I
The Qualifier Attributes represent values that can be compared to values on your Sales Order.
modifier lines should be applied to the Order.

d O
Using these qualifier attributes the Pricing engine can determine which modifier list and
Line.
a n
Basic Pricing limits the seeded qualifier context to for both the Modifier List and the Modifier
Qualifiers for Modifier Lists:

a l
Customer:
r n
• Customer Name
t e
In
• Bill to
• Ship to
• Customer Class
Modifier List:
c l e
r a
• Price List
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 73
Qualifiers for Modifier Lines:
Customer:
• Agreement Name
• Agreement Type.
Order:
• Customer PO
• Order Type.
When using Qualifiers:
• Qualifier Contexts are Descriptive Flexfields.
• Qualifiers Contexts do not store relationships among the hierarchies.
• Qualifier Context is a way of grouping similar attributes in the qualifier Flexfield.
• You indicate the level in the hierarchy by the flexfield sequence. This sequence is
defaulted on to the Price list or Modifier as the Precedence Number.
• The Qualifier Attributes represent values that can be compared to values on your Sales
Order. Using these qualifier attributes the Pricing engine can determine which Price List
should be used and which modifiers should be applied to the Order.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 74
Agenda
Agenda

• Using Modifiers
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 75
Modifier Overview
Modifier Overview
• Required to adjust a List Price

• Discounts, Surcharges, Freight/Special Charge
• Order or Line level
• Automatic, manual or overridable
• Qualifiers improve performance
• Enforce pricing policies with Qualifiers
• Visible from the Order and Order Line
n l y
e O
U s
Modifier Overview
Using Modifiers is the only way you are allowed to adjust the Price List price.
A I
pricing.
d O
Discounts, Surcharge and Freight and Special Charge are all valid Modifier types with basic
n
• Create Order Level Modifiers to apply modifier to all Order Lines.
a
a l
• Create Line Level Modifiers to apply modifier to only the current line.
Qualify your Modifier List to improve the performance. If the Pricing Engine can disqualify
n
Lists that are not applicable to the current pricing request it will improving processing time.
r
e
By putting qualifiers, that act as rules, on you modifier List and Lines you can create discounts
t
In
that will be automatically applied by the Pricing Engine to enforce your pricing policies.
From the Order or Order Line you can use the Action – View Adjustments to see the details of
l e
Modifiers that were applied automatically by the Pricing Engine or to apply Manual discounts.
c
Also, if the modifier is overridable you can use this form to enter new values or over ride the
a
pre-defined values.
r
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 76
Modifier Structure
Modifier Structure
• Type
• Currency • Cust Name
• Start Date List • Addresses
Modifier List
• Active Qualifiers • Cust Class
• Price List
• Level
• Type Line • Order Type
• Start/End Date Modifier Lines Qualifiers • Cust PO
• Automatic/Manual • Agreement
• Override Name
Type
Pricing
Price Breaks
Attributes
• Attribute
• Operator
• Qty/Price
• Discount % n l y
• Value • Effective Dates
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 77
Modifier List
Modifier List
• Uniquely name your Lists

• List Types:
Discount
Surcharge
Freight and Special Charge
• One Currency
• Start Dates
• Establish Rules with List Qualifiers
n l y
e O
U s
Modifier List
A I
(N) Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup
O
The Modifier Type restricts the kinds of lines that can be attached. Basic Pricing supports three
d
types of Modifier Lists:
a
• Discounts create a negative price adjustment. n
a l
• Surcharges create a positive price adjustment.
• Freight Special Handling creates a charge amount.
r n
Elements within the Modifier List form:
t e
• The Active checkbox allows the modifier list to be used by the Pricing engine.
In
• The Automatic checkbox at the List level is a default for lines.
• The Start Dates indicate when the Modifier List is effective.
e
c l
• The currency on the Modifier list must match the currency on the Pricing Request.
• Use a combination of qualifiers to establish pricing rules that will be respected by the
r a Pricing Engine.
O • Modifiers can remain Price List independent or you can use your Price Lists as qualifiers.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 78
Modifiers Lines
Modifiers Lines
• Modifier Number
• Level: Order or Line
• Modifier Type: Discount, Surcharge,
Price Breaks, Freight/Special Charge
• Start/End Date
• Print on Invoice
• Automatic/Manual
• Overridable
• Product Attribute
• Line Qualifiers
n l y
• Best Price
e O
U s
Modifier Lines
A I
(N) Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup (T) Modifier Summary
d O
The Modifier number is a unique identifier within a List. It can be alpha or numeric.
Levels within modifier lines:
a n
a l
• If you create an Order Level modifier the adjustment will be applicable to all lines on the
order. If it is a Freight Charge it would only be applied once to the Order Header.
r n
• Line Level modifiers only adjust the pricing request’s line.
Types of modifier lines:
t e
In
• Define Discounts to markdown the Price List Price.
• Define Surcharges to markup the order to handle minimum order requirements.
e
l
• Create Freight and Special Handling charges to meet your business requirements.
c
r a
• Price Breaks can either be Discounts or Surcharges. You can break on order quantity or
amount.
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 79
Elements when defining modifier line:
• The Pricing Engine uses the Start and End Dates to establish effectivity.
• Print on Invoice is controlled by a profile option. If it is selected the discounts will print
on your invoices. Otherwise, the net amount is passed to Receivables.
• The Automatic checkbox is selected if you want the Pricing Engine to apply the modifier
to all qualified orders and order lines.
• To create Manual discounts leave Automatic unchecked. You can use the Action – View
Adjustments to apply manual modifiers.
• To avoid a user from changing the Selling Price calculated by the Pricing engine leave
Override unchecked.
• Some businesses have such a flexible selling price that they need the ability to type right
over the calculated price with a new price. To do this you would need to create a
modifier line which has Automatic unchecked and Override checked.
• Optionally, restrict the modifier to a specific Item number or item category by using the
Product Attribute.
If the Pricing Engine finds multiple discounts that are qualified to be applied it always applies
the modifier which will give the best price to the customer.
View your Discounts and Surcharges from the Sales Order’s Action – View Adjustments
menu. View your Freight and Special Handling charges from the Action – Charges menu.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 80
Pricing Adjustment Examples
Pricing Adjustment Examples
Discount 10% off item A
10% surcharge for purchase

Surcharge
of under 100 units of item A
450 currency unit freight cost

Freight/Special Charge
on entire order
Price Breaks From To Percent
1 10 4
11
21
20
99999999
6
10 n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 81
Discounts/Charges
Discounts/Charges
• Charge Name for:

Freight/Special Charges
• Include Freight on Returns

• Formula for:
Freight/Special Charges
• Application Method
Percent, Amount, New Price
Lump sum
• Value for adjustment

n l y
e O
U s
Discounts/Charges
A I
(N) Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup (T) Discounts/Charges
d O
If the Modifier Line Type is Freight/Special Charge identify what type of charge is it by
a
Freight Costs, Handling costs or Insurance costs.n
selecting a Charge name. For example your modifier line may be for Duty fees, Export Fees,
a l
The Include on Return checkbox determines whether the Freight/Special charges should be
included on a Return order.
r n
t e
Freight/Special Charge modifier lines can be linked to a formula. If your modifier represents
an estimated freight you could write a formula to take the actual Shipping charges entered on
e In
the Ship Confirm form and update your estimates to reflect the actual costs. Freight and
Special Charges appear on the Invoice.
c l
The Application Method lets you apply a Percent of the lines value, a fixed amount, or New
r a
Price to adjust the Price list price. Any of these application methods will use the quantity
ordered to calculate the final selling price. If you are creating a Freight/Special Charge you
Ocan specify a Lump sum as the application method. Lump sum is independent of the lines
quantity.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 82
The Value could represent a percent, an amount, a new price or a lump sum and is the value
that the Pricing Engine will apply to the Order or Order Line.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 83
Guided Demonstration – Create Modifiers
(USA)
(N) > Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup
1. Enter the modifier list number in Number.
2. Enter the modifier list name in Name.
3. Select or clear Active. The pricing engine looks at this flag before it checks effectivity
dates and ignores inactive modifiers. Inactivating expired modifiers helps the pricing engine
to perform more effectively. You can query inactive modifier lists.
4. Select or clear Automatic. If you select Automatic for a list, all of its lines Automatic
defaults to selected.
5. Enter Currency. The pricing engine applies modifiers to sales orders of the same currency.
6. Enter the start and end date that the modifier lines are effective in Start Date. If you do not
enter dates and check Active, the list is effective from the creation date and does not become
ineffective.
n l y
7.
8.
Enter a description of the modifier list in Description.
Save your work. Whenever you add or change modifier information, the modifiers process
e O
runs the concurrent process QP: Maintains the denormalized data in QP Qualifiers which
U s
stores information to help the pricing engine locate the modifier in the most direct method.
9. Put a qualifier on your Modifier List.

A I
10. Click on the List Qualifier button.
d O
a n
11. If the Qualifier Groups window appears, this list has no qualifiers. Click on OK to access the
qualifier form.
a l
r n
12. The QUALIFIER window appears. You can add, change, and delete individual qualifiers,
change the grouping numbers, and change the dates. To add a qualifier:
t e
In
13. Enter the required field Grouping Number. Qualifiers with the same grouping number
generate an AND condition and qualifiers with different grouping numbers generate an OR
e
condition.
c l
r a
14. Enter
− Qualifier Context
O − Qualifier Attribute
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 84
− Operator
15. Value From and Value to
Note: some qualifiers use large valusets, for example, those based on all customers. For the
Value From and Value To fields, if you want to reduce the number of items that display in
the list of values: Enter search criteria in the field and Click the list of values indicator
16. If you do not enter search criteria and click the list of values indicator, you see a window,
which advises that you have not entered search criteria and that the search may take a long
time:
17. If you want to see a reduced list of values display, click No, enter search criteria, and click
the list of values indicator
18. If you want to see the entire list of values display, click Yes.
19. If you do not want to see the list of values, click Cancel.
20. Set the profile option QP: Valueset Lookup Filter to avoid this message.
21. Add Modifier Lines.
22. In the Modifiers Summary tabbed region, Modifier No is a required field, the form provides
a default modifier number as an identifier for the modifier line. You can change the value,
however, you must insure that the value in Modifier No for each modifier line is unique
n l y
within the modifier list.
e O
23. Enter Level:
− Line: The pricing engine determines if the pricing request is eligible for this
U s
level.
A I
modifier by validating the request for each line. It applies this modifier at the line
− Order: The pricing engine determines if the pricing request is eligible for this
d O
modifier by validating the pricing request header. It applies this modifier at the
order level but prorates a percentage value to each line.
a n
l
24. If you select Order, you can only select Percent for Application Method.
a
Price Break
r n
25. Enter Modifier Type from the following: Discount, Surcharge, Freight/Special Charges,
t e
In
26. Start date and end date on the modifier line must be between the start date and end date on
the modifier list. The pricing engine uses the modifier line dates to determine if this line is
e
effective.
c l
a
27. Enter the Start Date and End Date of this modifier line.
r
O
28. Print On Invoice is reserved for future use.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 85
29. Select Automatic. If you select it, the pricing engine automatically applies this modifier. If
you clear it, someone must manually apply it to an order.
Note: Basic Pricing allows for only 1 automatic discount. If the Pricing Engine finds
multiple automatic discount that could all be applied it will apply the discount that is best for
the customer “Best Price”.
30. Select or clear Override. If you select it, you can change the value of this modifier on each
order that you enter.
31. Enter the Pricing Phase for this modifier line.
Note: Basic Pricing doesn’t support phases, incompatabilities, or Buckets.
32. In Product Attribute, select a segment in the item context of the Pricing Context descriptive
flexfield, for example, Item, Item Category, or All Items.
− Use All Items to define a modifier that applies to all items in your product
hierarchy.
− Enter the value for the segment, for example, Item or Item Category, in Product
Attribute Value. If you select ALL_ITEMS for Product Attribute, Product Attribute
Value is ALL.
− Note: If you do not enter values for Product Attribute and Product Attribute Value,
the Pricing Engine applies the modifier line as if you selected ALL_ITEMS for
Product Attribute.
33. In the Discount/Charges tabbed region, select or clear Include on Returns. If you select it, n l y
the pricing engine includes freight charge on returns. The default is selected.
e O
34. Enter a Formula, if you are creating Freight/Special Charges modifier
U s
Valid values are:
A I
35. Enter the Application Method to instruct the pricing engine how to apply this modifier.
specified in the Value.

d O
− Amount: Creates a fixed price adjustment on each unit for the amount
a n
− Percentage: Creates a percentage price adjustment on each unit for the
percentage specified in the Value.
a l
− New price: Overrides the selling price of this item and makes the new price
specified in the Value the new selling price. Creates a price adjustment for
r n
the difference in list price and the new price.
e
− Lumpsum: Creates a price adjustment for this lump sum amount on the
t
In
entire line. Lumpsum is independent from the quantity. Used for
Freight/Special Charges.
c l e
36. Put a qualifier on your Modifier Line.
r a
37. Click on the List Qualifier button.
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 86
38. If the Qualifier Groups window appears, this list has no qualifiers. Click on OK to access the
qualifier form.
39. Enter the required field Grouping Number. Qualifiers with the same grouping number
generate an AND condition and qualifiers with different grouping numbers generate an OR
condition.
40. Enter
− Qualifier Context
− Qualifier Attribute
− Enter Operator
41. Value From and Value to
42. Save your work.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 87
Practice - Create Modifiers
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to create Modifier Lists and Modifier Lines.
• Create a Modifier List
• Put a Qualifier on the Modifier List
• Create Discount Modifier Line
• Create a Price Break Modifier Line
• Create a manual surcharge Modifier Line
• Enter a Sales Order to test Modifiers.
Assumptions
n l y
•
•
The URL s for accessing the HTML login page and apps login page.
e O
•
Seeded Vision Data
You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training U s
A I
Tasks
d O
a n
2.
l
Choose the responsibility Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)
a
3.
r n
Create a Modifier List and put a qualifier on the list.
• t e
N > Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup
4.
e In
Create an automatic Line level 10% Discount.
• c l
(T) Modifier Summary
r a
O
5. Create an automatic Line Level price break modifier that will apply a percentage discount
based on the ordered quantity of AS54999.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 88
6. Create a Line Level Manual 2 % Surcharge modifier. Allow override to give flexibility to
applying surcharges to an order line.
7. Enter a Sales Order using price list XX-Base Prices.
• (N) > Orders, Returns > Sales Order
8. Test the 10% automatic modifier by entering line l.l for AS54888 with a quantity of 1. Then
apply the manual surcharge of 2 % to line 1.1.
• (T) Line Items.
9. Enter a line for AS54999 with a quantity of 25 to test your quantity break discount.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 89
Solution - Create Modifiers
Login
Create a Modifier List
2. (N) > Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup

− Type: Discount List
− Number: XX-Mod List
− Active:
− Name: XX Modifier List
− Automatic:
− Currency: LOV
− Description: Enter a Description
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
3. Click on (B) List Qualifiers.
a n
4.
a l
If a “Qualifier Group” window pops, Click on (B) OK to access the qualifier form.
− Accept
r n Default grouping number
−
t e
Qualifier Context: Modifier List
−
− In
Qualifier Attribute:
Operator:
e
Price List
=
−
l
Value From:
c
XX-Base Prices
5.
r aClick on (B) OK.
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 90
Create Automatic Line Level
6. (T) Modifier Summary.

− Accept Default Modifier No
− Level: Line
− Modifier Type: Discount
− Automatic:
− Override:
− Pricing Phase: 10 List Line Adjustments
7. Click on (T) Discounts/Charges. n l y

− Application Method: Percent.
− Value: 10.
e O
U s
A I
d O
Create Automatic Line Level Price Break Modifier
a n
8. Add a new line . a l
− Accept
r n Default Modifier No
− Level:
t e Line
− Modifier Type:
−
e In
Automatic:
Price Break Header
−
c l
Override:
ra
− Pricing Phase: 10 List Line Adjustments
− Product Attribute: Item Number
O −
−
Attribute Value:
Volume Type:
AS54999
Item Quantity
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 91
− Break Type: Point
− Operator: BETWEEN
− UOM: Ea
9. (T) Price Breaks.

− Adjustment Type: Discount
n l y
e O
10. Click on (B) Define Details.
U s
11. Enter From to Values:
A I
− 1 – 10
− 11 – 20
8 %
12 %
d O
− 21 – 999999999 15 %.
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 92
12. Save .
13. Close the Price Break form. n l y

Create a Line Level Manually
e O
14. Add a new line .
U s
− Accept
− Level:
Default Modifier No
Line
A I
− Modifier Type: Surcharge
− Automatic:
d O
− Override:
a n
− Pricing Phase:
l
10 List Line Adjustments
a
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
15. Click on (T) Discounts/Charges.
− Application Method: Percent.
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 93
− Value: 2.
16. .
Note on MANUAL DISCOUNTS: Your business may require that users be able to apply a
manual discount during order entry.
− To create a discount that can be applied manually and the value can’t be changed
enter: Automatic and Override .
− To create discounts that can be applied manually AND allows the user to modify the
defaulted value enter: Automatic and Override .
17. Close forms .
Enter Sales Order
18. 18.(N) > Orders, Returns > Sales Order

− Customer: Business World (1608).
− Customer PO: XX-013. n l y
− Price List: XX-Base Prices.
e O
19. Populate all required Order Header fields.
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 94
Enter Line
20. (T) Line Items.

n l y
− Item:
− Qty:
AS54888.
1.
e O
U s
A I
d O
21. Save .
a n
a
22. Click on (B) Actions > View Adjustments. l
r n
Notice that your 10 % discount has been automatically applied.
t e
In
Let your instructor know if your modifier was not automatically applied.
c l e
(Hint: check to be sure that your XX-Base Prices price list is displayed in the Pricing tab).
O ra
23. Add a new Adjustment line
− Modifier Number:
− Accept
.
XX-Mod List.
2 (default).
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 95
24. Click on (B) Apply.
Notice that the price now has been adjusted with the10% discount and the 2 % surcharge.
n l y
e O
U s
Enter a Line
A I
25. Add a new order line
− Item:
− Qty:
.
AS54999.
d O
25.
a n
a l
26. Save . r n
t e
In
27. Click on (B) Action > View Adjustments.
e
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 96
Notice that the system automatically applied the Price Break modifier of 15% because it
gives a better price to the customer than the automatic 10% discount.
− IMPORTANT: if you are using a database that has Advanced Pricing installed your
results will be different. The Pricing Engine would have applied both the 10% and n l y
the 15 % because they are both setup as automatic.
− The results would be a lower unit price:
e O
U s
A I
28. Close forms .
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 97
Summary
Summary
In this module, you should have learned how to:

• Understand the Pricing Engine
• Enter Price Lists
• Maintain Price Lists
• Create Agreements
• Create Formulas
• Use Qualifiers
• Create Modifiers
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Basic Pricing
Chapter 9 - Page 98
Overview of Shipping
Execution
Chapter 10
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Overview of Shipping Execution

Chapter 10 - Page 1
Overview of Oracle Shipping Execution
Overview of Oracle Shipping Execution
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 10 - Page 2
Objectives
Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to

do the following:
• Explain where Shipping Execution is positioned
within the Order to Cash Lifecycle
• Describe the overall Shipping process
• Discuss the key areas in the Shipping process
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 10 - Page 3
Order to Cash Lifecycle

Transfer Ordering/Pricing
Accounting
to General
Scheduling
Ledger
Ordering
Cash
Management Shipping
Accounting
Collecting
Receipts AutoInvoice
to
Receivables
n l y
Invoicing
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 10 - Page 4
Overview of Shipping in the Order to Cash Process
Overview of Shipping in the

Order to Cash Process
Shipping
Order Picking Staging

Management
n l y
Inventory and Order Management
O
Shipping
e
U s
Overview of Shipping in the Order to Cash Process
A I
Shipping runs pick release for booked orders from Order Management. The picked orders are
O
taken from inventory and are dropped in the staging area prior to being shipped. When ship
confirm is processed an API runs to decrement inventory and a separate API runs to update the
d
n
order. After the sales order line is updated, it can proceed through AutoInvoice to Receivables.
a
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 10 - Page 5
Overview of the Shipping Process

Creates Details
Move Order Move Order
Run Pick Release Move Order Inventory
Transact Move Order
Material
Load Truck Dropped
n l y
Ship Confirm Staging Sub-inventory
O
Pick Confirm
e
U s
A
When the order line is ready it is pick released. This creates the move order that canI
O
automatically detail where to get the item. The items are brought from inventory to the staging
area. The pick confirmation process in the system can automatically occur when you run pick
d
a n
release. Once the items are loaded on the truck from the staging area you can run the ship
confirm process. When you run the ship confirm process the system can decrement inventory
Receivables for invoicing the customer.

a l
and update the sales order. The information can then be transferred through AutoInvoice to
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 10 - Page 6
Overview of Shipping Execution Integration
Overview of Shipping
Execution Integration
Booked
Orders
Decrement Update
Inventory Orders
Inventory Shipping Order
Execution Management
n l y
e O
U s
Overview of Shipping Execution Integration
A
Shipping runs pick release on booked sales order lines from Order Management. After I
O
processing ship confirm, it sends information to decrement inventory and update the sales
order line information. In addition, this inventory related activity will trigger the creation of
d
a n
the Cost of Goods Sold account (COGS). Order Management sends the order line through
AutoInvoice to Receivables. Inventory and Receivables send all of the accounting information
to the General Ledger.
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 10 - Page 7
Overview of Shipping Concepts
Trips Stops
Deliveries Delivery Legs

n l y
e O
U s
A I
A trip is carrier specific and includes at least two stops – a pick-up and a drop-off.
d O
A stop is a point along the route and can consist of a pick-up, drop-off, or both.
A delivery is a consolidation of sales order lines based on at least the customer, ship from
location, and ultimate ship to location.
a n
trip.
a l
A delivery leg is represented by a bill of lading and consists of at least two stops and one leg or
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 10 - Page 8
Overview of Pick Release
Which Orders to fill? Release Rules
In what order to fill? Release Sequence

Rules
How to group on the Pick Slip Grouping

n l y
Pick Slip? Rules
e O
U s
Release Rules determine which orders meet the criteria to be pick released.
A I
picked order lines.
d O
Release Sequence Rules determine in what order available inventory will be allocated to the
n
Pick Slip Grouping Rules determine how released lines will be grouped on to pick slips.
a
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 10 - Page 9
Overview of Pick Confirm and Staging Sub-inventory
Overview of Pick Confirm

and Staging Sub-inventory
Source Transfer Staging

Location Sub-inventory
n l y
e O
U s
Overview of Pick Confirm and Staging Sub-inventory
A I
Pick release creates a move order to transfer inventory from the source location to the staging
confirmation.
d O
area. The actual movement from the source location to the staging sub-inventory is called pick
n
Note: Pick Confirm can be completed manually or automatically.
a
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 10 - Page 10
Overview of Delivery Management
Sales order lines that have been released

for shipping are called delivery lines and
can be used to create a delivery.
Deliveries can be created manually or

automatically and are required to perform
ship confirmation.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
Deliveries can be created automatically during pick release by selecting the check box –
O
Autocreate Deliveries in the Release Sales Orders window. They can also be automatically
created in the Shipping Transactions form by selecting the Actions button and choosing
d
Transactions form.
a n
Autocreate Deliveries. Otherwise, they can be created manually from the Shipping
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Overview of Ship Confirmation
Staging Load Ship

Sub-inventory Truck Confirm
n l y
e O
U s
A I
The items are loaded on the truck from the staging area you can run the ship confirm process.
O
When you run the ship confirm process the system can decrement inventory and update the
sales order. The information can then be transferred through AutoInvoice to Receivables for
d
from Inventory and Receivables.
a n
invoicing the customer. Finally, accounting information can be sent to the General Ledger
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Summary
Summary
In this module you should have learned how to:

• Explain where Shipping Execution is positioned
within the Order to Cash Lifecycle
• Describe the overall Shipping process
• Discuss the key areas in the Shipping process
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Shipping
Chapter 11
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Chapter 11 - Page 1
Shipping
Shipping
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Chapter 11 - Page 2
Objectives
Objectives
After completing this module, you should be able

to do the following:
• Understand the complete shipping cycle from
Pick Release through Ship Confirm
• Release Sales Orders for Picking
• Ship Confirm picked orders
• Perform the necessary Shipping Setups
• Understand Shipping’s APIs and Interfaces
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Chapter 11 - Page 3
Agenda
Agenda
• Understanding Shipping Concepts

• Using Pick Release
• Entering Ship Confirm
• Defining Shipping Setups
• Shipping APIs and Interfaces
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Chapter 11 - Page 4
Ship Order
Ship Order
Enter
Book
Reserve
Pick
Stage
Ship
n l y
e O
U s
Ship Order
A I
Once a Sales Order has been booked, the Sales Order Lines must complete all workflow
Line and Create Supply.

d O
activities leading up to the Shipping Activity. Two typical preceding activities are Schedule –
Schedule – Line:
a n
Scheduling the line makes the Order Line’s demand visible to Inventory for planning. It also
sets the Shipment Schedule Date.
a l
Create Supply:
r n
t e
Configurable items must complete the Create Supply activity which takes an order line through
a build cycle. The final assemblies that are completed out of Work in Process are received to
e In
inventory as Reserved for a specific customer’s order.
Drop ship order lines must complete the Create supply activity too. Once a Purchase
c l
Requisition has been passed to Purchasing the Order line advances to the Shipping Activity.
r a
Standard shippable items don’t need to perform any of the Create Supply activities so directly
advance to the Shipping activity.
OShipping:
Shipping
Chapter 11 - Page 5
When an Order Line reaches the ‘Ship Line’ workflow activity, Order Management calls
Shipping APIs to indicate that a line is pick eligible.
The line status is changed to “Awaiting Shipping”. Order lines that are awaiting shipping are
called “Delivery Lines” in the Shipping module.
Pick Release moves orders to a staging location and reserves inventory. From the staging area
shipments can be weighed, packed and shipped.
Orders are ship confirmed out of the staging location.
When a delivery is ship-confirmed, Shipping calls OM APIs to communicate the event,
triggering the line flow to move forward.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Chapter 11 - Page 6
Shipping Concepts
Shipping Concepts
Trips Deliveries Delivery Lines LPNs Locations
Bill of Lading
n l y
e O
U s
Shipping Concepts
Trip
A I
warehouse carrying deliveries.
d O
• A trip is carrier specific and represent a unique instance of that carrier leaving your
own fleet of trucks

a n
• The carrier could be a public carrier such as UPS, DHL, FedEx, or could be a company’s
a l
• A trip could represent a truck, air cargo, ship cargo, or railcar. These entities would be set
n
up as Items in Inventory with an item type of “vehicle”.
r
e
• Each trip has a minimum of two stops, Pick-Up and Drop-Off.
t
In
• A trip can be created automatically or manually from the Shipping Transaction form or
can be automatically created from the Ship Confirm form.
l e
• Companies that use public carriers let the system automatically create Trips as part of of
c
the Ship Confirm process. This eliminates unnecessary transactions.
r a
Stops
O • A Stop is a point along the route that a trip makes to it’s final destination.
Shipping
Chapter 11 - Page 7
• The Ship Confirm process initiates the “Pick-Up” stop and putting the Delivery “In-
Transit”.
• Manually record all stops made by the Trip using the Shipping Transaction form or have
the Ship Confirm process automatically close a Trip, which creates and closes the “Pick
up” stop and changes the Delivery status to “Shipped”.
• Companies that use public carries let the system automatically close a Trip as part of Ship
Confirm.
Delivery leg
• A Delivery Leg consists of two stops where the delivery is picked up and dropped off,
respectively on the same trip. The delivery might travel through several legs to get to its
final destination. A Delivery leg is synonymous to the Bill of Lading.
• A bill of lading is a receipt, listing all the goods that were signed over to a carrier.
• The Ship Confirm form has the option to generate a bill of lading which can then be
printed as part of the Delivery Document Set.
Deliveries
• A Delivery is required to perform Ship Confirm. It represent all the goods that were
shipped from the same warehouse, going to the same Customer location.
• The grouping of delivery lines into deliveries is restricted by the grouping rules that are
established on the Shipping Parameters - Delivery Grouping Tab.
• A Delivery can be created automatically or manually from the Shipping Transaction
form at any time after the order lines have become “Awaiting Shipment” or can be
automatically created during the Release Sales Order process.
Delivery Lines n l y
• Delivery Lines are Sales Order Lines which have completed all their workflow activities
e O
that are prerequisites to Shipping such as Schedule – Line or Create Supply.
U s
• Delivery lines are visible from the Shipping Transaction form. They are also visible from
LPNs
the Sales Order Line’s Additional Information – Deliveries tab.
A I
• LPN, (License Plate Number) are also known as Containers.
d O
• A container can be loaded inside of another container, for example, pack an item into a
box and then pack that box onto a pallet.
• Containers must be setup as inventory items.a n
a l
• Containers can be made mandatory using your Shipping Parameters.
Ship From
r n
t e
• The Ship From location represents the warehouse that is performing the shipping
In
transaction. A warehouse is an Inventory Organization. Each address that you can ship
from within an organization must be setup as an Inventory location.
Ship to:
c l e
• The Ship To location represents a “Ship-To” address that has been setup on the
r a Customer’s record.
O
Shipping
Chapter 11 - Page 8
Pick Release Concepts

Which Orders to fill? Release Rules
3 2 1
In what order to fill? Release Sequence

3 1 2 Rules
What material to use? Picking Rules
How to group on Pick Slip? Pick Slip Grouping

n l y
Rules
e O
U s
Release Rules
A I
d O
• Release Rules define the criteria to be used during Pick Release. Only orders which meet
the criteria and are eligible will be Released. An Order line is eligible if it has completed
Release Sequence Rules

a n
the prerequisite workflow activities, such as Schedule - Line or Create Supply.
a l
• Release Sequence Rules determines the order in which inventory is allocated to sales
r n
orders. Users can choose to allocate by order, outstanding Invoice value, Scheduled
Date, Departure Date & Shipment Priority.
t e
• The order in which sales orders are filled could be very important. If a company has a
e In
problem of running out of material before all of their orders have been filled it is very
important that they have filled their most important orders first.
c l
Picking Rules
r a
• Picking Rules, which are created and maintained in Inventory, suggests which material to
use, based on inventory controls such as Revision control, Lot control, FIFO (first in first
O out) or subinventory/locator picking numbers.
Shipping
Chapter 11 - Page 9
• Picking Rule is an Item Attribute. Create a variety of picking rules and associate them
with the appropriate items. If there isn’t a Picking Rule associated with the item, the
system will use the Organization’s default Picking Rule which is found on the Shipping
Organization’s Parameters.
• Note: Picking Rules are covered in Inventory. To learn more see Inventory’s users
guide.
Pick Slip Grouping Rules
• Pick Slip Grouping Rules organize how released order lines are grouped on Pick Slips
for ease of picking. For Example: By using the Pick Slip Grouping Rule "Sub-Inventory"
the user can reduce the number of trips to a particular subinventory by grouping all lines
for that sub-inventory on to one Pick Slip.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Shipping Transactions User Interface
Shipping Transactions User Interface
Query Manager Data Manager

• Trips • Pick Release
• Stops • Ship Confirm
• Deliveries Create/Plan
• Delivery Lines • Trips/Stops
• Containers • Deliveries
• Saved Queries • Delivery Lines
• Folder enabled • Containers
n l y
e O
U s
Shipping Transactions user interface
A I
(N) > Shipping > Shipping Transaction
d O
The Shipping Transaction form is a workbench that consolidates planning, executing and
a n
viewing all aspects of the Shipping Process. The user interface is composed of two elements;
the Query Manager and the Data Manager. It allows for extensive use of Oracle Folders and
l
Tree Capabilities. Change prompts, move fields, hide/retrieve fields.
a
Query Manager
r n
e
• The query manager finds trips, stops, deliveries, delivery lines and containers.
t
In
• Define and Save queries using the query manager for fast retrieval of data.
Data Manager
l e
• Create or change data easily using the Data Manager.
c
• Plan trips, stops, deliveries, delivery lines and containers.
r a
• Perform Pick Release and Ship confirm from the same form.
O
Shipping
• Pick Release can be launched directly from the Shipping Transaction form based on
criteria set up in shipping parameters or the Release Sales order form can be called from
the Tools menu.
• Use the Ctrl - Right mouse button to select multiple records to transact at one time.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Pick Release Process Flow
Pick Release Process Flow
Move Orders
Enter Move
Order Transactions Allocate Inventory
Inventory Pick
Reservation Slips
Pick Confirm
Source n l y
Stage Subinventory Transfer
e O
Location
U s
Pick Release Process
What Happens during Pick Release:
A I
d O
• A pre-approved Move Order is automatically created in Inventory.
• A Move order is a request for a subinventory transfer from the source (stocking)
n
subinventory to the destination (staging) subinventory.
a
a l
• A Move order is created for every Sales Order Line that has the status of “Awaiting
Shipping” and passes the picking criteria (Use your Release Rules to guide this process).
n
• The Destination subinventory is the Staging subinventory entered on the Release Sales
r
t e
Orders form or defaulted from the Shipping Parameters. Only one staging subinventory is
allowed per Picking Batch.
In
• Note: A Picking Batch is the total number of Order Lines that were released at one time.
e
c l
• Inventory uses the move order to manage material requisitions within an Organization.
Allocate Inventory to the move order
r a
• Allocating can be done automatically after the move order is created by setting “Auto
O Allocate” to yes on the Release Sales Order form or postponed until later, then manually
allocated from the Transaction Move Orders form.
Shipping
• The Release Sequence Rule, that was entered on the Release Sales Orders form, or
defaulted from the Shipping Parameters, will be used to determine in what sequence to
fill the move orders.
• Move orders use inventory’s picking rules to suggest the material that should be
allocated. The sourcing values for subinventory, locators, revisions, and lots are defaulted
on to the move order.
• Serial Numbers can be allocated if the profile option: INV: Detail Serials = “Yes”. If it is
set to “No” serial numbers can be entered before Pick Confirm from the Move Orders
form or after Pick Confirm from the Shipping Transaction form.
• The source defaults can be manually updated from the Transaction Move Orders form.
• A high level reservation is placed for the Move Order’s material requirements.
• Allocating inventory is a prerequisite for printing Pick Slips. The Pick Slip Grouping
Rule entered on the Release Sales Orders form or defaulted from the Shipping Parameters
is used while printing pick slips.
Pick Confirm the move order
• Pick Confirm can be done automatically during the picking process by setting “Pick
Confirm” to yes on the Release Sales Orders form or by unchecking the Pick Confirm
Required checkbox in the Organization Parameters form. If it is not done automatically
during pick release it can be done manually from the Transaction Move Orders form by
selecting the Transact button.
• The Pick Confirm transaction executes the subinventory transfer, moving the material
from it’s source location to it’s destination staging location. Only 1 staging subinventory
is supported per picking batch.
• The high level reservations are replaced with detail reservations. n l y
• Note: A high level reservation puts a reservation on a given quantity. For example if
e
the sales order line needs ten 12” Monitors and you have 15 on hand, the reservation will
O
U s
guarantee that 10 of them will be available for this order but it doesn’t specify which 10.
Detail reservations puts a reservation on specific subinventory, locator, revision, and lot
number.
A I
• If you transact less than the requested quantity, the Move Order will stay open until the
d O
total quantity is transacted, or the order is closed or cancelled.
• The status of the Sales Order Line, which is linked to the Move Order, is changed to
n
“Picked” making it eligible for Ship Confirm.
a
a l
• If not all of the Move order quantity was transacted the status of the Sales Order Line, is
changed to “Picked Partial”. During Ship Confirm the order line will split into 2
n
shipment schedules (e.g. 1.1 and 1.2). The status of the unfilled line will be changed to
r
t e
“Awaiting Shipping”.
• If there is a shortage of material a shortage messages alerts the appropriate individual.
e In
• If an organization’s actual picks rarely deviate from the suggested material, it is
suggested that you run your picking process with Auto Allocate and Pick Confirmed set
c l
to Yes to cut down on the overhead which is required to transact manually.
r a
Auto Create Deliveries - Optional
• A delivery is required in order to Ship Confirm. You can select to have the Picking
O process automatically group your delivery lines into deliveries to expedite this process.
Shipping
Ship Confirm Process Flow
Ship Confirm Process Flow
Ship Confirm Delivery
Ship Backorder Stage Cycle

* Count
Inventory Requires Leave
Re-Pick Staged B.O.
Cost of Inventory
Goods Sold Activities Transfer
Reservation
To Cycle
Issue from
stores
Remove
Reservations
Decrement
Inventory
Count
n l y
* Reservations removed
e O
U s
Ship Confirm Process
What happened during Ship Confirm:
A I
d O
The results of the picking process are recorded against a Delivery.
• Ship Confirm can only be performed on Deliveries with Delivery Lines that have been
Pick Confirmed.
a n
a l
• Ship confirming a delivery records the results of the picking process. These results could
be shipped, backordered, staged or cycle count or a combination of all 4.
n
• The workflow activity will be completed when the quantity picked is recorded as
r
“Shipped”.
t e
In
• If the ordered item is set up with the item attribute “Shippable” checked, Ship
Confirming is a prerequisite for Invoicing.
l e
• The Sales Order – Action- Additional Line Information – provides a complete history of
c
the line’s shipping process from “Ready to Release” through “Shipped”.
r a
Over/Under Tolerances
O
Shipping
• The Ship Confirm process will check the Over/Under tolerance associated with the
customer, the item, as well as the corporate policies set up using profile options. OM:
Under Shipment Tolerance, OM: Over Shipment Tolerance.
• At ship confirm, you can confirm a quantity greater than the quantity on the line if it is
within the over-shipment tolerance. If it is greater than the over shipment tolerance, a
warning will be given. The actual quantity shipped is recorded on the line. The point of
using over-ship tolerances is to allow a greater quantity to be shipped without having to
add another line to the Sales Order.
• The under-shipment tolerance works a little different - at ship confirm, you can confirm a
quantity less than the quantity on the line - but if the quantity shipped is within the under-
shipment tolerance, then the line will be closed once the shipment is processed. If the
quantity shipped is outside the tolerance, the line will split into 2 lines - the one line
representing the quantity shipped and the other containing the difference. The point of
using under-ship tolerance is to save the user from having to cancel any remaining little
bits of a line, if there is no intention or need to ship it.
• Invoicing of over shipments will be controlled by the profile option, OM: over shipments
Invoice Basis - which will control whether to invoice for the quantity shipped or quantity
ordered. Under shipments are always invoiced at quantity shipped.
Shipped Quantities
• Once the delivery is closed the Order Line is updated with the shipped quantities and the
status of the line is changed to “Shipped”. This enables the order line to proceed to its
next workflow activity.
• The Ship Confirm transaction initiates the Inventory Interface to generate the “Issue of
Stores” transactions that will decrement inventory and remove the material reservation. n l y
Then the OM interfaces is initiated to update the Sales Order Line with Shipped
quantities, freight charges, etc.
e O
• The Cost of goods sold account number that is passed to inventory is workflow
U s
generated. In Inventory it creates a Material Distribution record that is ultimately passed
to the General Ledger.
A I
• If Ship confirm is partial the remaining quantity can be either staged or backordered.
Backordered Quantities
d O
returned to their source location.
a n
• Backordered quantities are left in the Staging Subinventory. They are not automatically
l
• A new pick release will be required before they can be ship confirmed.
a
r n
• The backordered quantity is removed from the delivery being Ship Confirmed.and the
reservation is removed making the quantity available to ATP.
t e
• The Sales Order line splits into shipment schedules. One schedule will have the quantity
In
that was shipped and a status of “Shipped”. The other schedule will have the quantity
that was backordered and a status of “Awaiting Shipment”. Example of resulting split.
e
l
Original Sales Order line:
c
r a
Line Item
1.1 BB-2002
Ordered
10
Shipped
Picked
Status
After Ship Confirm (8 shipped 2 backordered)
O 1.1 BB-2202 8 8 Shipped
Shipping
1.2 BB-2202 2 Awaiting Shipment
Staged Quantities
• Staged quantities are left in the Staging subinventory and can be Ship Confirmed at a
later time. The staged quantity is removed from the delivery being confirmed and
optionally linked to a new delivery number.
• The Sales Order line splits into shipment schedules. One schedule will have the quantity
that was shipped and a status of “Shipped”. The other schedule will have the quantity
that remained Staged with a status of “Picked”.
• Example of an automatic split performed by the shipping process.
Original Sales Order line:
Line Item Ordered Shipped Status
1.1 BB-2002 10 Picked
After Ship Confirm (8 shipped 2 staged)
1.1 BB-2202 8 8 Shipped
1.2 BB-2202 2 Picked
Cycle Count
The Cycle Count capabilities will be available with a future family pack.
• Without Cycle count the Backordered quantity’s reservation is automatically removed
during the Ship Confirm process. This sometimes is not appropriate since it frees up the
inventory to be reserved by another delivery line. By using the Cycle count functionality
you have the option to transfer the reservation on a pick released item to Cycle Count and
simultaneously backorder the delivery line quantities which helps keep available
n l y
inventory accurate.
e
• This would be used if unexpected situations occur while staging orders such as, an item isO
damaged or physical inventory is out of balance with the system inventory. By
U s
transferring the reservation to Cycle Count, future reservations cannot be placed against
that quantity.
A I
• If you select “Cycle Count all” the entire reserved quantity for a delivery is transferred to
d O
Cycle Count and the delivery line status is changed to backordered.
• If only specific quantities should be transferred to cycle count you must first enter a
a n
Shipped quantity on the delivery line’s detail form. Then from the Ship Confirm form
select “Ship entered quantities” and in the “Unspecified quantities” LOV select Cycle
l
Count. The result is that only the shipped quantities are confirmed and the balance of the
a
r n
delivery lines will be Backordered and the reservations for that quantity will transfer to
Cycle Count. Example of resulting split.
t e
• Original Sales Order line:
Line Item
e
1.1 BB-2002 In Ordered
10
Shipped Status
Picked
c l
After Ship Confirm (8 shipped 2 backordered)
r a 1.1 BB-2202 8 8 Shipped
O 1.2 BB-2202 2 Awaiting Shipment
Shipping
Delivery Line Processing Statuses
• Ready to Release
• Released to Warehouse
Booked Order
• Staged
• Backordered
• Confirmed
• In Transit
• Shipped
n l y
e O
U s
A I
The Shipping process provides Delivery Line statuses to reflect at what stage in the shipping
process the delivery line is current at.
Ready to Release
d O
which is eligible for Pick Release.
a n
The Order Line has been booked and passed to shipping execution. It is now a delivery line
Release to Warehouse
a l
n
Pick Release has started but not completed. Either no allocations were created or the
r
e
allocations have not been Pick Confirmed.
t
In
Staged
Staged occurs after pick confirm to indicate that the subinventory transfer has been executed.
l e
The quantities are now staged and ready for shipping.
c
Backordered
r a
The delivery line has been pick released but no allocations were created or partial allocations
Ooccurred.
Confirmed
Shipping
This delivery status indicates that the delivery line is either shipped or backordered and the trip
stops are still open.
In transit
This delivery status indicates that the delivery associated with the line is ship confirmed and
the pick up stop is closed.
Shipped
This pick status indicates that the delivery associated with the delivery line has been
confirmed. The Shipping process ends and the sales order line advances to it’s next workflow
activity.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Shipping Roles and User Security
Trips Stops Deliveries Lines/LPN
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Grants & Roles Definitions
d O
Shipping Execution is made up of many functional areas such as, Trips, Stops, Deliveries,
perform all of these shipping functions.

a n
Delivery Lines and LPNs (Containers). It is not always appropriate to allow all users to
a l
Using Roles and Grants controls users access to only the options consistent with their role.
granting full edit mode. r n

This in turn secures shipping data by selectively hiding or displaying view-only fields or
t e
New users must be granted permissions to the shipping areas that are appropriate to their
shipping role.
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Agenda
Agenda

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Pick Release Parameters
Controls the Picking Process
n l y
e O
U s
A I
Pick Release parameters are Organization specific. Once the organization is entered on the
picking batch.
d O
Release Sales Order form the parameters will default values and establish controls on the
a n
If a Release Rule is used either from the Release Sales Order form or by SRS, the Release
Rule’s defaults are used in place of the Pick Release Parameters.
l
If Pick Release is launched from the Shipping Transaction’s Action button, the picking
a
Default Values: r n
parameters for the shipping organization are used to provide the default values.
t e
• Release Sequence Rule, Pick Slip Grouping Rule, Picking Document Set, Staging
In
Subinventory, Staging locator.
e
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Controls:
• Whether to print pick slips immediately, or wait until the process is complete.
• Whether grouping delivery lines into Deliveries will be restricted to within an Order or
across Orders.
• Whether to automatically create deliveries as part of the picking process.
• Whether to automatically allocate inventory as soon as the mover order is created.
• Whether the Picking process should respect Ship sets and Ship Model Complete sets.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Methods to Pick Release
Release Sales Orders

Online

Concurrent

n l y
SRS
e O
U s
Online
A I
d O
• When the Release Sales Orders is submitted from the user interface, as “Online”, it
releases one order immediately, eliminating waiting for the order to process through the
Concurrent Manager queue.
• Only one Sales Order at a time is allowed.
a n
a l
• A Release Rule and Document set are required.
Concurrent
r n
e
• When the Release Sales Orders is submitted via the user interface, as “Concurrent”, it
t
In
runs Pick Release in the background, allowing you to run other processes simultaneously.
Standard Report Submission (SRS)
l e
• When a Standard Report Submission (SRS) runs Release Sales Orders it runs in the
c
background on an automatic, scheduled basis. Using SRS and your Release Rules, you
r a can run a specific release at the same time every day
ONote: The Shipping Transaction’s Tools menu provides a link to the Release Sales Order UI
to allow picking either “Online” or “Concurrent”.
Shipping
Configurable Process
Pick Release Sales Order Results after Pick Release

One Step Picking: Move Order Created
Auto Allocate = Yes Inventory Allocated
Auto Pick Confirm = Yes * Material moved to Stage
Two Step Picking: Move Order Created
Auto Allocate = Yes Inventory Allocated
Auto Pick Confirm = No
Three Step Picking Move Order Created
Auto Allocate = No
Auto Pick Confirm = No
* The picking process is complete

when the material has been moved
n l y
to the Staging Subinventory
e O
U s
One-Step Process
A I
d O
Auto Allocate is set to Yes and Auto Pick Confirm is set to Yes.
• When the request is submitted the system automatically creates a Move Order for all
n
eligible order lines that meet the picking criteria.
a
a l
• The Release Sequence Rule is used to sequence the orders for inventory allocation.
• Inventory’s Picking Rule is used to detail the Move Order with suggested material.
r n
• Pick Slips are printed and can be reprinted if needed later.
t e
• The subinventory transfer is executing moving the material from it’s source location to
In
the destination staging subinventory.
• The Order Line status is “Picked”, making it eligible to be Ship Confirmed.
c l e
r a
O
Shipping
One Step Shipping Scenario:
The One Step process would be for an organization who’s shipment profile is one where the
order lines do not require a lot of change. Typically the majority of what is picked is Shipped
in full and the process requires minimal manual intervention. This type of process is also
appropriate for shipment profiles that are simple and repetitive. High volume non MSCA non
WMS would probably use a one step process.
Two-Step Process
Auto Allocate is set to Yes and Auto Pick Confirm is set to No.
• When the request is submitted Move Orders are created.
• Inventory is allocated and the Move Order is detailed with source information.
• Pick Slips are printed.
• The Order Line status is still “Awaiting Shipping”.
Manually Pick Confirm from the Transact Move Orders form to complete the picking process.
Two Step Shipping Scenario:
The Two Step process allows some automation by having the system allocate the material but
gives the Material Handler more control by allowing changes to be made at the Pick
Confirmation step. The two step process is typically used by organizations that use mobile
scanning devices where the Material handler scans material as its being picked. Probably not
used by organizations who pick and ship from the desktop due to the number of transactions
necessary to process the shipment via the forms.
Three-Step Process
Auto Allocate is set to No and Auto Pick Confirm is set to No.
n l y
• When the request is submitted Move Orders are created.
• The Move Order has not been detailed.
e O
• Pick Slips cannot be printed.
U s
• The Order Line status is still “Awaiting Shipping”.
• Manually allocate inventory from the Transaction Move Orders form
A I
• Manually Pick Confirm from the Transaction Move Orders form.
Three Step Business Scenario:
d O
a n
The Three Step process would be for organizations that have full RF Mobile device
capabilities. The number of transactions required to process a shipment requiring all three steps
l
would be unreasonable using the desktop but it could be done. It also has the most control and
a
n
the most flexibility in the picking process.
r
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Auto Create Delivery

ABC To
Print San Jose
From Delivery 1
Seattle
Group by:
UPS Prepaid • Ship From
• Ship to
• Customer
ABC To • Carrier
Print New York • Freight Terms
From
Seattle Delivery 2
DHL Prepaid
n l y
Delivery Lines
O
Deliveries
e
U s
Deliveries are required to perform Ship Confirm.
A I
d O
Deliveries can be automatically created from the Release Sales Order form during Pick Release
or from the Shipping Transaction’s Action menu any time prior to Ship Confirm.
Transaction form.
a n
If Autocreate is not executed, Deliveries can be manually created from the Shipping
Deliveries Lines
a l
n
Delivery Lines are Sales Order Lines which have completed all their workflow activities that
r
e
are prerequisites to Shipping such as Schedule – Line or Create Supply.
t
In
Delivery Grouping Tab
Lines are grouped based on the grouping attributes specified on the your Organization’s
l e
Shipping Parameters – Delivery Grouping Tab. There are two mandatory attributes, Ship From
c
location and Ship to location. Optionally, group by Customer, Freight Terms, FOB,
a
Intermediate ship to location, Ship Method, and Carrier.
r
O
Shipping

• First Step in Shipping Process
• Line Status: Awaiting Shipping
• Prior Reservations only
• Document set
• Move Orders Created
• Holds (User Hold/Credit Hold)
Selection Criteria
Ship From: Seattle
Ship Date From: Null
Ship Date To: Current Date
Carrier: UPS
Find all the orders that are
scheduled to ship today
(or earlier) from Seattle, that n l y
are shipping UPS.
e O
U s
A I
d O
(N) > Order Management > Shipping > Release Sales Order > Release Sales Order
Releasing Sales Orders for picking is the first step in the shipping process.
n
• The Shipping activity must be in the Line’s workflow. The line status must be “Awaiting
a
a l
Shipment” and the item’s attribute Shippable must be selected.
• Some companies have a problem with material shortages or incorrect balances. To
n
combat these issues it may be necessary for a Scheduler to manually reserve inventory for
r
t e
specific Sales Order Lines, prior to picking. In order to assure that the picking process
selects only the orders planned by your schedulers, select “Prior Reservations Only” from
e In
the Release Sales Order form.
• The Document Set defines what reports will be printed from your picking process. For
c l
example you may request that Pick Slips and an Exception Report be printed.
r a
• Move Orders are created for every Sales Order Lines that is released.
O
Shipping
Holds
• All user defined holds must be removed from the Order or Order Line prior to picking.
• Credit Check holds that are placed on an order at booking may automatically be removed
by the picking process if the Customer’s AR balance has been decreased or their credit
limits have been increased.
• The picking process could apply a credit check hold if the order’s Transaction Type has a
value in the Credit Check Rule – Shipping field.
• If a credit hold is manually removed prior to pick release the system will not perform a
credit check, even if the Order Transaction Type has a value in the Credit Check Rule –
Shipping field.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Guided Demonstration – Release Sales Orders
(USA)
(N) > Shipping > Release Sales Orders > Release Sales Order > (T) Order
1. Enter a Batch identifier or let the system automatically generate a Batch number. All
delivery lines that meet the release criteria will be grouped into a batch.
2. Select a Document set.
3. Select a Based on rule.
4. Select from the Orders field: Unreleased, All or Backordered.
Note: “Unreleased” Orders have not gone through the pick release process. “Backordered”
Orders have been released but did not get shipped, either because of a shortage of material
or the Delivery line was backordered during ship confirm.
5. Select an Order Type to make it part of your picking criteria.
6.
7.
Enter an Order Number to release one order at a time.
Check Prior Reservation only if you only want to pick orders which have been manually n l y
reserved.
e O
8. Select a Customer to make if part of your picking criteria.
U s
9. Select a Ship-To to restrict the customer information to one ship to location.
A I
11. Click on the Shipping tab.
d O
10. Use the Schedule Ship date range and Requested Date ranges to select orders by date.
a n
12. Enter a Trip to make if part of your picking criteria.
a l
n
13. If you enter a Trip you can restrict the release to a given Stop.
r
t e
14. Enter a Ship Method (carrier) to include it in the picking criteria.
In
15. Enter a Shipment Priority to make it part of your picking criteria.
e
c l
16. If your delivery lines have been packed into containers select a container (LPN) line to make
r a
it part of your picking criteria.
O
17. Select “Yes” for Autocreate Delivery to have the system automatically generate Deliveries
for the released delivery lines.
Shipping
18. Select a Release Sequence Rule. (A Release Sequence Rule will default from the shipping
organization’s shipping parameters if you don’t enter one).
19. Click on the Inventory tab.
20. Enter a Warehouse code (M1).
21. Select a Pick Slip Grouping rule or accept default.
22. Select “Yes” for Auto Allocate to have material allocated and reserved during the picking
process.
23. Select “Yes” for Auto Pick Confirm to have material automatically moved to the staging
location for the released delivery lines.
24. In the Pick from Region enter a subinventory and locator if you want to restrict the picking
process to only release material from a given subinventory/locator.
25. In the Default Stag region accept the default staging subinventory and locator or select ones
from the LOV. Staging subinventory is required.
26. All material pick confirmed will be moved to the Staging Subinventory / locator entered
here.
27. Click on the Concurrent button to submit your picking criteria.

n l y
28. Click on the Online button if you want to release 1 order only.
e O
29. Make note of your Batch number because you will use it to identify your concurrent
requests.
U s
your Pick Slip report. A I
30. View your concurrent request to validate that the process completed normally and to look at
d O
31. Click on the (M) View > Request > (B) Find to find all requests.
a n
32. Your Batch number will be displayed in the concurrent request parameters field.
a
33. View the output of the Pick Slip report. l
r n
t e
34. View the results of the picking process by finding your sales Order in the Order Organizer
or Querying it in the Sales Order form.
In
35. Line status is “Picked”.
e
c l
36. Use the Action button to view Additional Order (or Line) Information.
r a
37. Click on the Delivery tab to see the status of your Delivery.
O
Shipping
Practice - Release Sales Orders
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to release a Sales Order for picking.
• Enter a Sales Order
• Release a Sales Order
• View Picking Documents
• View Delivery information from the Sales Order
Assumptions
• XX represents your initials.

n l y
e O
Tasks
U s
A I
2.
O
Choose the responsibility Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA).
d
3.
n
Create and Book a Sales Order with 3 order lines that will be used in the Picking and
Shipping practices.
a
4. Pick Release your Sales Order #.
a l
r n
5.
e
View your concurrent requests to validate that the Pick Release was successful.
t
6.
In
Find your Sales Order #. Open it and view the Delivery information.
e
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Solution - Release Sales Orders
Login
Create and Book Sales Order

3. (N) > Orders, Returns > Sales Orders > (T) Order Information
− Customer: Business World (1608)
− Customer PO: XX-020
− Order Type: Mixed
− Price List: Corporate
4. Enter all required header fields.

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
− AS54888
6. Add a new line .

− AS72111
7. Add a new line .

− AS18947
8. Click on (B) Actions > Split Line.
Enter: Request Date Ship To Warehouse

Qty
2 Today’s Date New York (OPS) M1
9.
2 2 Weeks from Today
Click on (B) Split.

San Jose (OPS) M1
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
In
If you don’t get the following results notify your instructor.
e
c l
r a
O
Shipping
10. Click on (B) Book Order.
− Write your Sales Order #: _______________________________.
11. Return to the Line Items region, (T) Line Items.
12. Validate that all of the order lines are “Awaiting Shipping”.
13. Close Forms .
Pick Release Sales Order

14. (N) > Shipping > Release Sales Orders > Release Sales Orders > (T) Order
15. Order Number: Sales Order # from previous step.
16. Accept default “To Dates”.

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
17. (T) Inventory.
18. M1.
• Note: The Shipping parameters for Seattle will default values on to the Release Criteria
form.
19. Validate that “Auto Allocate” and “Auto Pick Confirm” are Yes.
n l y
20. Click on (T) Shipping.
e O
21. Validate that the “Auto Create Delivery” is Yes.
U s
22. Click on (B) Concurrent.
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
• Write your concurrent request ID: ______________________.
n l y
Note: This concurrent request will spawn another request id.
e O
• Write your Batch #: _________________________________.
U s
23. Close Forms .
A I
View Concurrent Request
d O
n
24. (N) > (M) View > Requests > (B) Find (all requests).
a
Generation and Pick Slip Report.
a l
25. Look for your Batch # in the Parameters for the two concurrent requests, Pick Selection List
r n
26. Put your cursor on the concurrent request “Pick Slip Report” (where your batch # is visible
t e
in the Parameters field).
In
27. Click on (B) View Output.
e
c l
r a
O
Shipping
28. Close form .
Find Sales Order
29. (N) > Orders, Returns > Order Organizer > (B) Find
30. Find your Sales Order-by-Order Number or Customer PO XX-020.
31. Click on (B) Find.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
n
32. From the Summary tab Click on (B) Actions > Additional Order Information > Delivery.
a
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
33. If you do not see the above delivery information (“Staged”) let your instructor know.
(Check to make sure your Order is booked before alerting your instructor. If it is not booked
“Book” your order then release it).
34. Close the Additional Order Information window.
35. Click on (B) Lines.
Question: Why is line 3.2 still “Awaiting Shipping”?
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
l
Answer: Because it’s Scheduled ship date is 2 weeks in the future.
a
36. Close forms .
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Agenda
Agenda

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Shipping Parameters
Shipping Parameters
Controls the Ship Confirmation Process
n l y
e O
U s
Shipping Parameters
A I
parameters are used to control the confirmation process.
d O
Shipping parameters are Organization specific. During the Ship Confirm process the shipping
Defaults:
a n
a
invoice for international shipments. l
• Delivery Document Set. Packing papers, mailing labels, Bill of Lading, commercial
n
• Defer Interface (yes or no). Should Interfaces run immediately or not.
r
Controls:
t e
In
• Whether weight and volume is calculated automatically.
• Whether Containers are required.
l e
• Whether printing a pack slip is required.
c
r a
• Whether a Ship Method is required.
O
Shipping
Ship Confirm
Ship Confirm
• Last Step in Shipping Process
• Delivery Status: Staged
• Containers
• Calculate Weight & Volume
• UPS
• Add Shipping costs
• Enter quantities
• Set Delivery In-Transit
• Close Trip
• Document set
n l y
• Generate the Bill of Lading
e O
U s
Ship Confirm
A I
O
(N) > Shipping > Shipping Transaction (T) Delivery (B) Action – Ship Confirm
Ship Confirm is the last step in the Shipping Process. Order lines that have been ship
d
confirmed as “shipped” will be allowed to continue through the workflow to the Invoicing
activity.
a n
a l
A Delivery is required for Ship Confirming. The status of the delivery must be “Staged”.
Ship Confirm is executed from the Shipping Transaction form.
Containers/LPNs
r n
t e
Containers (LPNs) are optional. Pack delivery lines into containers. Pack containers into
vehicles. Using the Shipping Transaction form Automatically pack delivery lines associated to
e In
a delivery into containers. When auto-packing a delivery, the delivery lines are grouped
together by shared attributes such as ship-to location. Auto Pack uses the Container Load
c l
Details record.
r a
O
Shipping
Calculate Weight and Volume
Whether a company uses containers or not it is often necessary to calculate the weight and
volume of deliveries. The weight and volume entered in the Physical Attributes tab of the
item record is used. Calculate Weight and Volume can be done manually from the Shipping
Transaction form or set up through your Shipping Parameters to be automatic. Calculate the
tar (empty container), gross (container + delivery lines) and net (delivery lines only) weight for
delivery as well as the Percent fill value. A warning will display if the fill is less then the
minimum percent fill specified on the container’s item record.
UPS
Oracle and UPS have entered into a collaboration to fill multiple shipping needs. Oracle-UPS
APIs is a set of programs that integrate shipping information, provided by UPS Online Tools
into Oracle Applications suite to help customers streamline operations in the shipping process.
Oracle - UPS integration will enable you to:
• Verify shipment address/postal code.
• Inquire about time in transit for ground shipments.
• Get shipping costs for deliveries.
• Track the packages after shipment.
Each of these functions is accessible using the Shipping Transaction’s Action menu. Set the
Profile Option: WSH: Internet Proxy to enable UPS-Oracle API.
Add Shipping Charges
You can assign shipping costs to trips, stops, deliveries, delivery lines, delivery legs, or
containers. Insurance, Duty fees, Special Handing and freight charges are seeded Freight
Charge Types. Shipping Charges can be in any currency. They are not restricted by the Sales
Order currency. The currency will be converted to the currency of the sales order during the
n l y
shipping process.
Enter Quantities
e O
Enter the quantities that were shipped, backordered or left in the staging area. There is a
U s
checkbox available for creating a delivery with the split off staged quantities. This provides
all, or Cycle Count-all.

A I
the ability to group all staged lines together in a new delivery. Optionally, Ship-all, Backorder-
Set Delivery in Transit

O
Set delivery in-transit creates trips and stops for the delivery. Closes Pick-Up stop of the
d
a n
delivery, but leaves the Drop-off stop open. It sets status of the delivery to in-transit and
initiates Oracle Order Management (OM) and Inventory interfaces.
Close Trip
a l
Closes trip, all open stops. When the delivery’s trip stops have been closed, the delivery
closes.
r n
Document set
t e
In
The document set associated with Ship Confirm could include Pack Slips, Commercial
Invoice, mailing labels and Bill of Lading.
l e
Bill of Lading
c
Select the create Bill of Lading checkbox to have the system automatically create the
r a
shipment’s Bill of Lading.
O
Shipping
Guided Demonstration – Ship Confirm Delivery
(USA)
(N) > Shipping > Transactions
1. Enter your Order Number on the Query Manager form.
2. Click (B) Find.
3. Only Delivery lines with a Pick status of “Staged” can be ship confirmed.
4. From the Shipping Transaction’s Lines/LPNs tab click (B) Details.
5. Click on the Source tab to see Sales Order data.
6. Click on the Shipping tab to see the shipping locations and carrier information.
7. Click on the Inventory tab to see material information.
• Optionally, select the Assignment tab to assign a LPN item (container) to the delivery.
8. If you assigned a LPN you can use the Action menu to Pack the line.
n l y
9. Use the Action menu to calculate the weight and volume of your containers and Deliveries.
e O
10. Click on the Lines/LPN tab.
U s
Note: All Action menu items are executed by clicking on the “GO” button.
A I
Using the Action menu you can Split the delivery line. This may be helpful if you need to
assign a tracking number to each unit that was shipped.
d O
a n
If “Details Required” is checked additional data must be entered before the line can be Ship
Confirmed. Serial Numbers that are assigned at Sales Order shipment is an example of a
detail that would be required.
a l
r n
11. You must enter a quantity in the shipped field before you can enter a serial number. If you
t e
are shipping a quantity of 1 you can enter the serial number in the Inventory tab region. If
In
the quantity is greater than 1 you must use the Tools menu to access the Serial Entry form.
e
c l
12. Click on the Action menu and select Freight Costs to apply freight costs to the delivery line.
If the Freight Costs were spread across all deliveries you would apply the freight costs to the
r a
Delivery.
O
13. Use the LOV to select Cost types to use.
Shipping
14. The freight costs that default can be updated to reflect actual costs.
15. If you are linked to UPS you can use the action menu to check prices, validate zip codes and
track shipment.
16. If all of the delivery lines within a delivery have shipped completely you can eliminate
entering shipped quantities by using the “ship-all” feature on the Ship confirm form.
17. Enter a shipped quantity.
18. Any unshipped quantities default as backordered. Ship Confirm removes backordered
quantities from the Delivery that is being Ship Confirmed. Backordered quantities must be
pick released again before they can be ship confirmed.
19. You adjust the backordered quantity to identify any quantities that are still staged. Staged
quantities are removed from the Delivery that is being Ship Confirmed. You can optionally
request that the staged quantities be assigned to a new Delivery. Staged quantities that have
been associated with a Delivery can be Ship Confirm without going through the picking
process again.
20. If a Delivery wasn’t created before pick release or during pick release you can use the
Action menu to Autocreate a Delivery.
21. Click (B) Done.
22. Click (T) Delivery.

n l y
23. Click (B) Detail.
e O
24. Enter a Waybill number that will track all delivery lines within a Delivery.
U s
data. A I
25. Click on the Additional Delivery Information to add rounting instructions and import/export
d O
26. Use the Packing Slip tab region to generate a pack slip prior to Ship confirm.
a n
27. Click on the Actions menu and select Ship Confirm.
a l
28. Select the “Ship Entered quantities” if you entered shipped, backordered or staged
quantities.
r n
t e
29. Select “Ship All” if the Delivery shipped completely.
In
30. Select “Backorder All” if you want to release the Inventory Reservations so that the material
e
l
is free to be reserved to another order.
c
r a
31. Use the “Unspecified Quantities” LOV to specify how quantities that weren’t entered should
O be processed. For example: If the Delivery had 20 delivery lines that where Pick
Shipping
Confirmed and only one line shipped short. Just enter the shipped quantity for the shortage
and then choose unspecified quantity as “Ship”.
• If you have any staged quantities select the checkbox for “Create Delivery for Staged
Quantities”.
32. To keep the shipping process as simple as possible complete the Auto Create Trip Options.
33. If you enter a Ship Method (carrier) it will be used to generate the Trip but it won’t feed
back and update the Sales Order.
34. If the date you are performing the ship confirm process is different from the date of the
actual shipment enter the Actual Departure date.
35. Select Set Delivery In Transit.
36. Select Close Trip.
37. Select Create Bill of Lading if you want the system to generate the data to print a Bill of
Lading report.
38. Leave the Defer Interface UNCHECKED.
39. If you defer the interfaces the shipping process is not completed until the Trip Stop
Interface, Inventory Interface and the OM interface have been run.
n l y
40. Click (B) OK to start the Ship Confirm process.
e O
41. View your concurrent requests to see the reports, which were generated from the Shipping
documents.
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Practice - Ship Confirm Delivery
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to Ship Confirm a Delivery.
• Use the Shipping Transaction form
• Enter tracking information
• Enter Ship, Backorder and Stage quantities
• Apply freight costs
• Ship Confirm
• View Delivery Results
• View Order Line Statuses.
• View unshipped Delivery Lines.
Assumptions
n l y
•
•
XX represents your initials.
e O
•
iSupport 11.5.3 has been installed along with other dependencies and patches.
The URL s for accessing the HTML login page and apps login page. U s
• Seeded Vision Data A I
•
d O
You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training
n
a
Tasks
a l
r n
2. t e
Choose the responsibility Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)
3.
e In
Use your Sales Order to find the Delivery to Ship Confirm. Enter tracking numbers. Enter
l
quantities for shipped, backordered and Staged. Supply Serial Numbers when required.
c
r aEnter Freight Costs.
O
4. Look at your Sales Order Delivery information and Line status to see the results of your
shipping process.
Shipping
5. Find all of the Delivery Lines that haven’t shipped.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Solution - Ship Confirm Delivery
Find Delivery to Ship Confirm
3. (N) > Shipping > Transactions
4. Enter your Sales Order #.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
Question: Why did the system generate 2 Delivery Numbers?
r a
O
Shipping
n l y
Answer: Because the Shipping Parameters - Delivery Grouping rules requires that all
delivery lines within a Delivery must be shipping from the same warehouse (organization)
e O
and going to the same Ship-to location. In this case Business World requested that
AS54888 and AS72111 ship to San Jose and AS18947 ship to New York so the system
U s
6.
created two Delivery numbers.
Click on (B) Detail. A I

− XX-020-100
− 5
d O
− 5
a n
7. Save .
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
8. Use the keyboard down arrow to display the next delivery line.
− Tracking Number: XX-020-200
n l y
− Shipped:
− Backordered:
5
0
e O
− Staged: 5
U s
9. Save .
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
10. Use the keyboard down arrow to display the next delivery line.
− XX-020-300
− 2
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
11. Notice that the “Details Required” is checked.
Shipping
12. Click on (M) Tools > Serial Numbers.
− Accept default of Serial Number Ranges
− XX-12345
The system will generate the End Serial Number.
13. If the Quantity Entered equals the Quantity Shipped Click on (B) Done.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
l
14. If you were not returned to the Lines/LPNs tab click (B) Done in the Details form.
a
15. Save .
r n
t e
16. Put your cursor on your first staged delivery.
In
17. Click on (T) Delivery.
e
c l
r a
O
Shipping
18. Select Freight Costs from the Actions menu.
19. Click on (B) Go.

n l y
e O
U s
− Handling.
A I
− Accept the defaults.
d O
20. Click on (B) Done.
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
n l y
e O
21. Select Ship Confirm from the Actions menu.
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
23. Validate
r n
− “Ship Entered Quantities” is the Ship Option.
t e
− “Create Delivery for Staged Quantities” is checked.
In
− “Set Delivery In-Transit” is checked.
− “Close Trip” is checked.
e
c l
24.
r a .
O
25. Validate “Defer Interface” is unchecked.
Shipping
26. Click on (B) OK.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
•
t e
Write your Interface Trip Stop request ___________________________.

e In
c l
28. Put your cursor on your second Delivery number.
r a
29. Click on (T) Delivery.
O
Shipping
30. Click on (T) Detail. n l y
e O
U s
A I
31. Enter a Waybill number.
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
32. Select Ship Confirm from the Action menu.
n l y
34. Validate
− “Ship Entered Quantities” is the Ship Option
− “Create Delivery for Staged Quantities” is checked e O
− “Set Delivery In-Transit” is checked
U s
− “Close Trip” is checked
A I
35. .
36. Validate “Defer Interface” is unchecked.

d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
39. Click on (M) View > Requests > (B) Find (all requests)
40. Validate that your concurrent requests completed normally
41. Close forms .
Look at Sales Order Delivery Information
42. (N) > Orders, Returns > Order Organizer > (T) Order Information
− Enter your Sales Order number
− And/or Customer PO XX-020
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
44. From the Summary tab
r n
t e
In
45. Click on (B) Actions > Additional Order Information > (T) Deliveries.
c l e
r a
O
Shipping
46. Scroll to the right to see all of the shipping information.
47. Notice that a new Delivery number was automatically created for the Staged quantity.
48. Close the Additional Order Information window.
49. Click on (B) Open Order.

n l y
Notice that the Ship Confirm process automatically split the sales order lines to allow the
shipped quantities to proceed to invoicing.
e O
U
Also notice that the backordered line has a status of “Awaiting Shipping” not backordered.s
Backorder is the status of the delivery line.
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
51. Close forms .
O
Delivery Lines - Haven't Shipped
Shipping
52. (N) > Shipping > Transactions.
53. Select Line Status of “Not Shipped”.
54. Enter your Sales Order number.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
Questions: What does each of the delivery line statuses mean?
− Ready to Release
a l
− Staged
− Backordered
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
n l y
Answers:
− “Ready to Release” means this line can be pick released.
− “Staged” means the line has been pick confirmed but not yet ship confirmed. e O
− “Backordered” means this line has been through the picking process before but was
U s
not ship confirmed. Backordered lines must be pick released again.
A I
56. Close forms .
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Shipping Documents
Shipping Documents
Shipping Transactions Shipping Document Sets
Reports
• Packing Slip
• Pick Slips • Bill of Lading
• Mailing Labels
• Commercial Invoice
• Backorders
• Vehicle Load Sheets
Detail/Summary
n l y
e O
U s
Shipping Documents
Shipping Transaction Reports
A I
Lines are grouped according to the Pick Slip Grouping Rules.
d O
• Pick Slip Reports are printed at Pick Release for all delivery lines that were released.
• Backorder Reports provide information on Orders that have been backordered either
a n
because there wasn’t enough inventory to allocate or as the result of Ship Confirm.
Shipping Document Sets
a l
• Pack Slip lists all the goods being shipped on a delivery. Optionally print the customer’s
r n
Item number rather than your internal number.
t e
• Bill of Lading is usually a pre-printed form. It lists information for all the delivery lines
that were confirmed on a delivery.
e In
• Use the Choose Printer form to route Mailing Labels to a printer that is loaded with
printable labels.
c l
• Commercial Invoice lists all ship confirmed items in a delivery along with their currency
r a value.
• Detail Vehicle Load Sheet prints the loading sequence of items within a delivery.
O • Summary Vehicle Load lists all deliveries assigned to a trip.
Shipping
Guided Demonstration – View Shipping Documents
(USA)
(N) > (M) View > Requests
1. View the output of the Commercial Invoice.
2. View the output of the Packing Slip Report.
3. View the output of the Bill of Lading.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Shipping Exceptions
Shipping Exceptions
• View Exceptions
• Update Existing
Exceptions
• Enter New Shipping

Exceptions
n l y
e O
U s
Shipping Exceptions
A I
(N) > Shipping > Exceptions
d O
In the View Exceptions window, view, log, and update current and past exceptions that have
been logged either manually or automatically.
a n
a l
Use the Find Exceptions window to find selected exceptions or all exceptions. The search
displays the results in a series of tabs in the View Exceptions window: the Exception tab
r n
displays general information about the exception such as the exception name and exception ID.
The other tabs--Trip, Delivery, Container, and Inventory tabs--display additional information
t e
about the exception such as the trip, delivery, container, and inventory associated with the
In
exception(s). This information helps identify the source of the exception so that the appropriate
handling action can be taken.
e
l
Select a single exception to view or update it. Single exceptions display in the Log Exceptions
c
a
window.
r
O
Shipping
In both the View Exceptions and Log Exception windows, update details about a selected
exception by choosing the tab that corresponds to the information that needs to updated.
Some exceptions are set up to notify automatically if an exception occurs during a shipping
process (such as ship confirm). The notification alerts that an exception has occurred and
displays details to help identify the exception.
Note: Exceptions and processes for exception handling must already be set up before
exceptions can be viewed, logged, or updated. For more information, see: Define Exceptions in
the setup section.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Guided Demonstration – View Shipping Exceptions
(USA)
(N) > Shipping > Exceptions
1. Click on the Find icon to display the Find Exceptions window.
2. Select one or more of the following criteria for your query. Select only the criteria for the
exception(s) you want to find:
3. To view all exceptions, leave the search fields blank and choose the Find button.
− Exception Name: The particular name of the exception: for example, Picking Hold
exception.
− Logging Entity: The log-on entity of the exception: shipper, receiver, or
transportation carrier.
− Logged At Location: The location where the exception report was run (logged
location may be different from where the shipping exception occurred).
− Exception Location: The location where the shipping exception occurred.
− Inventory Organization: Exceptions according to a particular inventory
organization.
− Exception Type: Type of exception: delivery, picking, and trip.
− Last Update Date From/To: Identifies the range of update dates for exceptions in n l y
the report.
− Severity: Type of exception severity:
e O
− Low (Low Impact Exception): User gets warning but is able to complete
U s
operation.
I
− Medium (Medium Impact Exception): Operation cannot be completed without
handling the exception. A
handling the exception.
d O
− High (High Impact Exception): Operation cannot be completed without
n
− Status: Describes the current status of the exception:
a
a l
− Open: Initial status--not yet associated with an exception name.
− Manual: This exception needs to be processed manually.
n
− No Action Required: No handling required for this exception.
r
t e
− Not Handled: This exception could not be handled.
− Departure Date: Exceptions according to the departure date.
In
− Arrival Date: Exceptions according to the arrival date.
e
5.
l
Once you have completed your entries, choose the Find button to display the search results
c
r ain the View Exceptions window.
O
Shipping
6. Click the tab that corresponds to the information you want to view or update. For example,
to update trip information for an exception, choose the Trip tab. Choose from the following
tabs:
− Exception tab: Displays general details about the exception ID, such as the
exception ID, exception type, exception name, and a description of the exception.
− Trip tab: Displays information about the trip name, departure date, and arrival date.
− Delivery tab: Displays the delivery name and delivery detail ID about the exception.
− Container tab: Displays the container name, associated with the exception.
− Inventory tab: Displays the inventory information for the exception including the
inventory organization, inventory item, item description, lot number, revision, serial
number, UOM (unit of measure), quantity, subinventory, and locator.
Optionally, to view or update a single exception:
7. Select the exception in the View Exceptions window.
8. Choose (B) Open to display the selected exception in the Log Exception window.
9. Choose the tab to display the details that you want to view or update: Exception tab,
Trip/Delivery/Container tab, or Inventory tab.
10. View or update the available fields in the selected tab.
11. Choose (B) OK to save your changes.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Agenda
Agenda

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Shipping Parameters
Shipping Parameters
General Shipping
Shipping Parameters
n l y
e O
U s
Shipping Parameters
A I
General Tab Shipping Transaction Tab
d O
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Shipping Parameters (T) General (T) Shipping
n
Note: Shipping Execution uses the weight and volume classes to calculate the weight, volume
a
and percent fill for a shipment.
a l
Weight UOM Class: The values in the LOV are set up in Inventory. Select the weight class
n
that contains the units of measure used to set up your Items, containers and vehicles physical
r
attributes.
t e
In
Volume UOM Class: The values in the LOV are set up in Inventory. Select the volume class
that contains the units of measure used to set up Items, containers and vehicles physical
attributes.
c l e
r a
O
Shipping
Percent fill basis: There are three choices in the LOV, weight, volume, and quantity.
• If weight or volume is chosen, the calculation will be made from the item’s and
container’s physical attributes set up in Inventory.
• If quantity is chosen, the calculation is made based on the container load details setup,
which specifies the maximum quantity of a given Item that will fit into a given container.
Shipping Transaction Tab
The Shipping Transaction tab on the Shipping Parameters form sets most of the parameters that
relate to the functionality in the Shipping Transaction form.
Default delivery document Set: Select from the LOV the document set which was designed
for this organization shipping process. It will default during Ship Confirm of the delivery.
Weight/Volume calculation: Choices are automatic or manual.
• If “automatic” is chosen, the weight and volume will be automatically calculated when a
delivery status is set to “Confirmed”.
• If “manual” is chosen., the weight and volume can be calculated using the Shipping
Execution’s Action button.
Enforce Packing in Containers: Choices are Yes or No.
• If “Yes” is chosen, a warning message will appear during ship confirmation if any item in
a delivery is not assigned to a container. This message can be bypassed to complete a
shipment if necessary.
• If “No” is chosen, the system will not check to see that all items in a delivery are
assigned to a container.
Container Inventory Control: Future use.
n l y
Pack Slip required checkbox:
e O
• If checked, the system checks to see that a pack slip is printed for the delivery. An error
message will appear if a packing slip is not created.
U s
• If this box is not checked, the system will not check to see that a packing slip has been
generated.
A I
Goods Dispatched Account: This is known as the Cost of Goods Sold Account to use for this
transaction.
d O
organization and is used if the OM workflow cannot determine one for the sales order issue
n
Freight Class Category Set: Defaults the Freight Class Category set that is used for all items
a
in that organization.
a l
Commodity Code Category Set: Defaults the Commodity code that is used for all items in
that organization.
r n
t e
Enforce Ship Method checkbox: When Enforce Ship Method is checked, a ship method is
In
required at ship confirm.
Defer Interface checkbox: When Defer Interface is checked, the Interfaces do not run
l e
immediately at ship confirm. In this case, the Interface concurrent programs would be
c
scheduled to run at user defined intervals.
r a
Note: Defer Interface and Enforce Ship Method are settings for across all organizations.
O
Shipping
Pick Release
Shipping Parameters
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Shipping Parameters (T) Pick Release
d O
The Pick Release tab on the Shipping Parameters form sets most of the parameters that relate
to the picking process.
a n
have their own values defined.
a l
Since Shipping Parameters are organization specific, each of your shipping organizations can
n
Release Sequence Rule: Select a value from the LOV to default in the Release Sales Orders
r
e
form. This value can be over written before submitting the release, if applicable.
t
In
Pick Slip Grouping Rule: Select a value from the LOV to default in the Release Sales Order
form. It can be over written if necessary.
l e
Print Pick Slip: The LOV has two values, At the End or Immediate.
c
• If “At the End” is selected, the system will wait until the pick release job is finished
r a before sending them to a printer.
O • If “Immediate” is selected, the system will send a pick slip immediately to the printer.
Note: There is less impact on the system resources if “immediate” is used.
Shipping
Default Pick Release Document Set: Select a value from the LOV to default on the Release
orders form if a Release Rule isn’t used. This value can be over written before submitting the
release.
Autocreate delivery within an order: The choices are Within an Order or Across Orders’.
• If “Within an Order” is chosen, the Autocreate delivery process will create deliveries
from the selected order lines based on the order number and standard delivery grouping
attributes.
• If “Across Order”is chosen, the Autocreate delivery process will create deliveries from
the selected order lines based on the standard delivery only. This could resulting in
grouping orders across order numbers if all the grouping attributes match, i.e.. Same
customer, same ship to, same carrier.
Default Stage Subinventory: Select a value from the LOV to default during the Release Sales
Order process. This value can be over written.
Default Stage Locator: Select a value from the LOV. The is an Optional value.
Number of Pick Slip Lines: Enter the number of rows to print on each Pick Slip.
Auto Allocate checkbox: Select Yes or No. This value will default during the Release Sales
Order process. It can be over written.
• If “Yes” is selected, the system will automatically allocate inventory to the move orders.
• If “No” is selected, the inventory will be allocated manually from the Transaction Move
Order form.
Autocreate Deliveries: Select Yes or No. This value will default during the Release Sales
Order process and can be over written.
• If “Yes” the system will automatically create deliveries for the released order lines. n l y
• If “No” the delivery will need to be created from the Shipping Transaction form.
e O
Enforce Ship Sets & Ship Models checkbox: Shipping Execution enforces ship models and
ship sets during pick release when checkbox is checked.
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Delivery Grouping
Delivery Grouping
Delivery
Grouping
Shipping Parameters
n l y
e O
U s
Delivery Grouping
A I
d O
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Shipping Parameters (T) Delivery Grouping
The Shipping Parameters – Delivery Grouping tab defines the Shipping Organization’s
a n
grouping rules that will be used for grouping Delivery Lines into Deliveries. Whenever a
Delivery is created either automatically or manually the Delivery Grouping rules must be
l
adhered to. There are two mandatory grouping attributes:
a
n
• Ship From location (Shipping Inventory Organization) and
r
e
• Ship to location (Customer’s Ship-to site).
t
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Optionally select
• Customer,
• Freight Terms
• FOB code
• Intermediate ship to location
• Ship Method
• Carrier
Null values for Freight terms, FOB code, Ship Method and Carrier will be grouped with orders
that do have values.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Shipping Exceptions
Shipping Exceptions
• Define exceptions per

business requirements
• Define handling processes
for exceptions (Workflow)
• Record shipping exceptions
during shipment process
• Initiate exception handling
• View and track exceptions
n l y
e O
U s
Shipping Exceptions
A I
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Define Exception
d O
The shipping exceptions feature helps you identify and correct shipping exceptions that violate
n
the requirements of your operation or that of your carriers and customers.
a
a l
The shipping exceptions feature gives you the ability to define exceptions and processes for
handling them. You can record exceptions automatically from within Oracle Shipping
r n
Execution, or you can log exceptions manually through the user interface input forms. You
can initiate exception handling, and view and track the exceptions as you manage them to
resolution.
t e
e In
Any automation requires user defined workflow activities.
API’s are provided that allow you, with some custom programming, to use third party
c l
applications to log exceptions.
r a
O
Shipping
Seeded Exception are:
• WSH_PICK_BACKORDER
- Backorder occurred at picking time.
• WSH_PICK_HOLD
- Hold on the line at picking time.
• WSH_INVALID_PACKING
- Invalid Packing: Item(s) should be unpacked from the container.
• WSH_INVALID_DELIVERY_PLANNING
- Planned delivery has changes
• WSH_INVALID_PACKING_PLANNING
- Invalid Packing Planning: Planned packing has changes.
• WSH_UNPACK_ITEM
- Packing Exception.
• WSH_CUSTOMER_MERGE_CHANGE
- Change to delivery detail due to customer merge.
See the Shipping Technical Reference Manual for further information about the seeded
exceptions.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Guided Demonstration – Define Shipping Exceptions
(USA)
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Define Exceptions
1. Enter a unique exception name to identify the exception.
2. Enter a description for the exception definition.
3. Select the type of exception that you want to create: Delivery, Picking, or Trip exception.
4. Select one of the following default severity settings:

− High: The exception must be handled before the task can be completed.
− Medium: The exception must be handled before the task can be completed.
However, the manager can override it so that the task can be completed.
− Low: A warning is given but the task can be completed.
5. Choose one of the following exception handling methods:

− Manual: The exception must be manually corrected and the exception status must
be closed.
− Workflow: A workflow is used for exception notification and exception handling.
− No Action Required: No exception handling method is required. n l y
6. If you select workflow as the exception handling method, enter the workflow item type and
e O
enable the Initiate Workflow box.
U s
7. Save your work.
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping

Released Order Lines Pick Slips #
#1
Subiventory: FGI
Group By Delivery
#2
Delivery: 1
#3
n l y
Delivery: 2
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Order Management > Shipping > Setup >Picking > Define Pick Slip Grouping Rules
Form
d O
Pick Slip Grouping rules define how Released Order Lines will be grouped on Pick Slips.
a n
Have multiple grouping rules to meet a variety shipping needs. By associating Grouping Rules
a l
with Release Rules, control what will be picked and how they will appear on pick slips.
Group orders by subinventory so that all Orders filled from one subinventoy would be filled
r n
before going to the next subinventory.
t e
Select Delivery as a grouping criteria, all picking lines for the same delivery are grouped
together on a pick slip. If there are multiple deliveries, multiple pick slips are created.
e In
The Pick Methodology of “User Defined” allows group by Order#, Subinventory, Customer,
Ship to, Carrier, Trip Stop, Delivery and Shipment Priority.
c l
The other methodologies are reserved for Oracle’s Warehouse Management System. Also,
r a
there are grouping selections which are only available to WMS, Item number, Locator, Lot,
and Revision. See the WMS User’s Guide for more information.
O
Shipping
Guided Demonstration – Define Pick Slip Grouping Rules
(USA)
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Picking > Define Pick Slip Grouping Rules
1. Select a pick methodology:
• User Defined: You can modify the Group By clause with this value. Grouping is done
according to the parameters set by the user. A unique pick slip number is generated for
each group. All tasks corresponding to a pick slip number is dispatched to a single user.
• You can only use the following Pick Methodologies when the Oracle Warehouse
Management System (WMS) is installed:
• Order Picking: Grouping is done by order and a unique pick slip number is generated for
each order. The entire order will subsequently be dispatched to a single user.
• Zone Picking: Grouping is done by order and zone. A unique pick slip number is
generated for each group and dispatched.
• Cluster: No grouping of pick tasks is done. The tasks are ordered by locator and
dispatched to the appropriate users.
n l y
• Bulk: Grouping by item and locator is done. Tasks are consolidated based on this
e O
grouping and dispatched to the appropriate users.
U s
2.
3.
Enter a name for the grouping rule.
Enter a description for the rule. A I

4. Enter an effective date range for the rule.
d O
5.
a n
In the Group By region, select one or more grouping criteria for the pick slips.
6.
a l
You can use the following grouping criteria--Item, Locator, Lot, and Revision--when the
r n
Oracle Warehouse Management System (WMS) is installed.
7. Save your work. t e

e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Practice - Define Pick Slip Grouping Rules
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to create a Pick Slip Grouping Rule.
Assumptions
• “XX” represents your initials.
Tasks
n l y
3. Use your Sales Order to find the Delivery to Ship Confirm. Enter tracking numbers. Enter
e O
quantities for shipped, backordered and Staged. Supply Serial Numbers when required.
Enter Freight Costs.
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Solution - Define Pick Slip Grouping Rules
Login
Find Delivery to Ship Confirm
3. (N) > Shipping > Setup > Picking > Define Pick Slip Grouping Rules
− Pick Methodology: User Defined.
− Rule Name: XX-Subinventory.
− Description: Group picking lines by subinventory.
− Group by: Inventory .
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Released Order Inventory Allocations

Lines
Prioritize by:
• Shipment Priority
• Schedule Dates
• Order Number Source Move Orders with:
• Customer’s Open • Subinventory
Invoice value • Locator
• Revision n l y
Ascending or Descending
• Lot Number
e O
U s
A I
Form
d O
(N) > Order Management > Shipping > Setup > Picking > Define Release Sequence Rules
a n
Release Sequence Rules are used during the Pick Release process to determine in what order to
allocate material to the Released Sales Order Lines. This can be very important if inventory
l
balances are less than 100% accurate. If material runs out, the most important orders get filled
a
first.
r n
Default the appropriate Release Sequence Rule on to the Release Sales Order form by using a
Release Rule.
t e
e In
Assign a numeric value to Order Number, Shipment Priority, Schedule Date and Departure
Date to prioritize the importance of each attribute within the rule. The lower the value the
l
higher the priority.
c
r a
O
Shipping
Specify whether the attribute should be evaluated in an ascending or descending order
Example:
Priority Order Meaning
Shipping Priority: 1 Descending (Highest to Lowest Value)
Schedule date: 2 Ascending (Lowest to Highest Value)
The result would be that the highest priority released order lines with the earliest scheduled
date would have material allocated first.
One the choices for allocating material is the Customer’s Outstanding Invoice Value. It would
allocate inventory to the order which will be generating the most revenue. Customer’s
Outstanding value is mutually exclusive.
Example of how orders are selected if Customer’s Outstanding Invoice Value is used:
• Sales Order 5000 has a total revenue of 1000 currency units and a Backordered quantity
of 15.
• Sales Order 5200 has a total revenue of 1200 currency units with a Backordered quantity
of 2.
• Since the total invoice value of sales order 5200 is greater it would receive the first
available material.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Guided Demonstration – Define Release Sequence Rules
(USA)
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Picking > Define Release Sequence Rules
1. Enter a name for the rule.
2. Enter a description for the rule.
4. Establish a Release Priority by assigning a numeric value to each entity that you want to
prioritize. The lower the numeric values the higher the priority.
5. Prioritize entities: Order (Number), Outstanding Invoice Value (Sales Order with the largest
Invoice value), Schedule (Ship) date, Departure (Planned to Ship) date, Shipment Priority
(user defined could be alpha or numeric values).
Note: “Outstanding Invoice Value” is mutually exclusive; any other priorities will be
ignored.
6. Select to prioritize entities in an Ascending order (starting with the lowest value and
n l y
ascending upward) or Descending order (starting with the highest value and descending
downward).
e O
7. Save your work.
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Practice - Define Release Sequence Rules
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to create a Release Sequence rule.
Assumptions
Tasks
n l y
3.
O
Create a release sequence rule that will allocate inventory to the orders with the earilest ship
e
date. If multiple orders have the same ship date, you want the oldest orders to be filled first.
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Solution -Define Release Sequence Rules
Login
Create Release Sequence
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Picking > Define Release Sequence Rules
− XX-Oldest First.
3. Allocate material to oldest orders first.

− Order 2 Ascending.
− Schedule Date 1 Ascending.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Release Rules
Release Rules
Criteria to Release Orders Release Sales Orders
By Customer
Carrier
Order #
Date Range “Based on Rule”

541 SRS
541
541
Ship Date From:

Ship Date to: 05-May-2002 “Release Rule Name”
n l y
e O
U s
Release Rules
A I
d O
(N) > Order Management > Shipping > Setup >Picking > Define Release Rules Form
Release Rules are used during the pick release process to define the criteria used to determine
Rules:
a n
which Order Lines will be released for picking. There are two ways you can use Release
a l
• On the Release Sales Orders form as the “Based on Rule”. If used in this way it acts as
the request. r n
a defaulting tool. The values that are defaulted can be over written prior to submitting
t e
• On the Release Sales Orders SRS form as the “Release Rule Name” to dictate the release
e In
criteria which will execute in the background from a concurrent request. A Release Rule
is required to use SRS, standard report submission.
c l
r a
O
Shipping
If Carriers are on a regular schedule, such as DHL comes in the morning and UPS comes in the
afternoon. Create Carrier specific Release Rules, then set up several Release Sales Orders SRS
schedules to run the appropriate Release Rule at the appropriate time.
Although the Release Rule is the first setup to be used during the Pick Release process it is not
the first rule you would create. Both the Release Sequence Rules and the Pick Slip Grouping
Rules would be set up first since they are used by the Release Rule.
Release Rules can be created based on criteria represented in three different tabs. This will
enable you to create rules that can respond to all of your picking needs.
Order tab - criteria = order type, order number, customer, item, unreleased/backordered/all,
ship set #, scheduled ship dates from and to, request dates from and to.
Note: Enter the current date (today’s date) in the “to” Date fields so that whenever the rule is
used, the system will automatically reset them to the current date.
Shipping tab - criteria = carrier, ship from, shipment priority, release sequence rule, auto
create delivery, shipment priority.
Inventory Tab - criteria = warehouse, pick slip grouping rule, auto allocate, auto pick
confirm.
Warehouse is a required field. Once you enter a warehouse the Shipping Parameters for that
warehouse will be used to default values into the Inventory and Shipping tabs. These values
can be over written, as needed.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Guided Demonstration – Define Release Rules
(USA)
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Picking > Define Release Rules form > (T) Order
1. Enter a name for the Release rule.
3. Select from the Orders LOV.
• All if your rule should release both new and backordered orders.
• Backordered if your rule is to just release orders that have been through the picking
process.
• Unreleased will only release orders that haven’t been through the picking process.
4. Enter a Customer to restrict the releases to orders for just 1 customer.
5. If you enter a Scheduled Ship Date To and Requested Date to as the current date and time
then each time you use this rule to launch Release Sales Orders SRS, the dates will be
n l y
6.
updated to the current date.
Click on the Shipping tab.

e O
7. Select a Carrier to restrict the releases to only 1 carrier.
U s
8. Select a Shipment Priority to restrict the releases to 1 Shipment Priority.
A I
9. Select a Ship From location.
d O
n
10. Select a Release Sequence Rule to be used when this rule is executed.
a
a
11. Select Yes or No from Autocreate Deliveries. l
r n
12. Select a Document Set that will print whenever this rule is executed.
t e
In
13. Click on the Inventory tab.
e
c l
14. Enter a Warehouse. The warehouse field’s LOV displays Inventory organizations that you
can ship out of. Warehouse is a required field for a Release Rule.
r a
15. Select a Pick Slip Grouping Rule that will be used by the Release Rule.
O
16. Select Yes or No for Auto Allocate.
Shipping
17. Select Yes or No for Auto Pick Confirm.
18. Enter a Pick From Subinventory to restrict where the material can be filled from.
19. Enter a Default Stage Subinventory to indicate the staging location for the Release rule.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Practice - Define Release Rules
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to create a Release Rule.
Assumptions
• XX represents your initials.
Tasks
n l y
3. Create a Release Rule that will select eligible order lines that are shipping from Seattle’s
e O
M1- location. Your rule will pick unreleased orders as well as backorders.
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Solution - Define Release Rules
Login
Create Release Rule
3. (N) > Shipping > Setup > Picking > Define Release Rules form > (T) Order
− XX-Seattle’s Rule
− All
− Scheduled Ship Date – To: Today’s Date
− To: Today’s Date
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
4. (T) Shipping.
e In
c l
− M1-Seattle
− XX-Oldest First
r a − Yes
O − LOV
Shipping
5. (T) Inventory.
− M1
− XX-Subinventory
− Yes
− Yes
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Container Load Details
Container Load Max Preferred

Item Item UOM Quantity Flag
Box4 BB-2002 Ea 4
Pallet Box4 Ea 8
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Container Load Detail
d O
A container load record is required for calculating Percent Fill if the Shipping parameter has
“Quantity” as the fill bases.
a n
a l
Container-item relationships specify the maximum number of load items (Monitor, Keyboard),
that can be packed into a load item (Box, Pallet).
n
A container can be a load item. For example: pack a Monitor into a box for the convenience of
r
e
the customer and then pack the box into a pallet for the convenience of shipping.
t
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Guided Demonstration – Define Container Load Details
(USA)
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Container Load Detail
1. Select the Container Item from the List of Values.
2. The Container Item and Container Type display in the window.
3. Select the load item that you want to place in the Container Item.
4. Select a unit of measure.
5. Define the maximum quantity of items that can be placed in the Container Item.
6. Check the Preferred Flag if this is the default container for the load item. Autopack uses the
preferred flag.
7. Continue defining all your Container-Item relationships until completed.
8. Save your work.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Ship Methods- Carriers- Relationships
Ship Methods- Carriers- Relationships

Define Freight Carries
Define Ship Methods
Define Relationships
Link a Document set to a
Ship Method
Ship Freight Service Web

Method Org Carrier Level Enabled
UPS-1 DAY AIR M1 UPS Next Day
UPS-2ND DAY AIR M1 UPS 2nd Day
n l y
UPS Ground M1 UPS Ground
e O
U s
Carrier-Ship Method Relationship
A I
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Freight > Define Carrier Ship Method
d O
Shipping can respond to a customer’s shipping requests by assigned a shipping method to a
freight carrier.
a n
a l
Establishing a relationship between the Freight Carrier and the Ship Method is a mandatory
step prior to assigning a Ship Method to an order or delivery.
n
Carrier-Ship Method Relationships are Organization specific allowing you to eliminate carriers
r
e
which are not available in certain regions.
t
In
Using the Document Categories form it is possible to associate different document sets with
each Carrier-Ship Method combination. For example, you may want to include a Commercial
c l e
Invoice only if it is an International shipment.
Three setup steps are required:
r a
• Create Freight Carriers
O • Create Ship Method

• Assign Ship Method to a Freight Carrier
Shipping
Define Freight Carriers:
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Freight > Define Freight Carriers
Since Freight Carriers are Organization specific you will be prompted to select an Organization
code prior to entering the Define Freight Carriers form.
Enter the name and description of the carrier along with an account number. This account can
be used when you perform inter-organization transfers and specify freight costs. The account
number is also available to the Account Generator workflow to build the account numbers that
will be used to capture shipping charges that will be passed to AR.
Create Ship Methods:
(N) > Inventory > Setup > Organizations > Shipping Methods
Ship Method can be applied at any time prior to Ship Confirm. Once a delivery has been Ship
Confirmed, the Ship Method becomes a permanent record associated with that shipment and
cannot be changed.
Ship Method is a prerequisite in order to create a Bill of Lading for a delivery.
If the Ship Method is entered on the Sales Order and then changed during the shipping process,
the change is not passed back to the Sales Order.
The Ship Confirm form is your last opportunity to enter or change the Ship Method for a
delivery.
You can put controls on your Ship Method by selecting the checkbox “Enforce Ship Method”
on the Shipping Parameters form. When this feature is checked you are required to enter a ship
method before ship confirm. A error message will be displayed and you will be prevented from
completing your ship confirm process, if there is no Ship Method associated with the delivery.
Companies using public carriers will want to use this option. However, a company with a n l y
private fleet of trucks may elect to NOT enforce ship methods since their own trucks are
always used to transport shipments.
e O
Shipping Method is a lookup code which is available across all organizations.
U s
access level must be set to User or Extensible.
A I
Lookup codes have an Access Level. In order to be able to add new Shipping Methods the
d O
Enter a unique alpha-number code describing the Ship Method you are creating.
The Meaning should be a short descriptive statement, (maximum, 80 characters).
by this ship method, (maximum, 240 characters).

a n
The description field allows the you to clearly state the type of service which will be provided
a l
You can optionally enter a Tag to describe your Ship Method. The tag can be used to
characters.
r n
categorize lookup values, such as modes of transport, (rail, truck, marine, air). Maximum, 30
t e
Carrier-Ship Method Relationship
In
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Freight > Define Carrier Ship Methods
e
c l
A Ship Method must be assigned to a Freight Carrier to be available within an organization.
The same Ship Method can be assigned to the same Freight Carrier in multiple organizations.
r a
However, a Ship Method cannot be used more than once within an organization.
O
Shipping
You can establish grouping rules using a Carrier-Ship Method as a processing criteria. By
selecting Ship Method, you can process orders according to the carrier who will transport the
shipment to better manage your deliveries.
The Service level feature allows you to specify service levels ONLY when the carriers listed in
the Freight column is “UPS”. Standard UPS service levels are seeded in the LOV. This list of
values cannot be changed.
The web enabled checkbox is used by Oracle iStore to determine which ship methods they
want to offer the web user.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Guided Demonstration – Define Carrier Ship Methods
(USA)
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Freight > Define Carrier Ship Methods
1. Select a Ship Method from the LOV.
2. Select the Organization that can use this carrier ship method.
3. Select a freight carrier from the LOV.
4. If the carrier is UPS select a Service Level (1 day air, 2 day ground)
− Enable
5. Save your work.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Guided Demonstration – Define Freight Carriers
(USA)
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Freight > Define Freight Carriers
1. Enter freight carriers name e.g. UPS, DHL.
2. Enter a description for the carrier.
3. Select a distribution account.
Hint: To generate a list of valid code combinations put your cursor in the first position of
the account field, enter a percent sign (%) then tab out of the field.
4. Optionally enter active beginning and ending dates.
5. Save your work.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Freight Cost Types
Freight Cost Types
• Enter an Amount for each Type
n l y
Freight - Insurance - Handling - Export Fees - Duty Fees
e O
U s
Freight Cost Types
A I
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Freight > Freight Cost Types
d O
Freight Costs are the actual costs incurred for the movement of goods by a carrier.
n
Freight Costs include, but are not limited to: freight cost, handling charge, insurance,
a
a l
import/export license fees and miscellaneous changes, such as, restocking fees, return fees,
miscellaneous fees and charges for late payment. These miscellaneous charges are seeded
n
Freight Cost type lookup codes which can be linked to a Freight Cost Type record.
r
t e
You can assign a currency and an “estimated” amount to each Freight Cost record. The
amount is defaulted on to the Ship Confirm form when a freight cost is entered, but can be over
e In
written when appropriate.
Use the “Map to Charge” checkbox if you have created Freight and Special Charge modifiers.
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Guided Demonstration – Define Freight Cost Types
(USA)
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Freight > Define Freight Cost Types
1. Enter a name for your new Freight Cost type.
2. Select a Type from the List of Values. The values are user defined Lookup codes and can be
used to group like cost types (Insurance, Duty, Handling).
3. Select the currency that will be associated with this freight cost type.
4. Enter the amount that will be defaulted when this freight cost type is used.
5. Enter Effective from – to dates.
6. Check “Map to Charge” to allow Freight/Special charges modifiers to be defined for this
Freight Cost Type.
7. Save your work.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Freight Cost – Freight Charges
Freight Cost – Freight Charges
Shipper’s Costs Customer’s Charges

n l y
e O
U s
Freight Costs – Freight Charges
Charges
A I
for movement of a shipment to a destination.
d O
Freight and Special Charges are defined as the dollar amount applied to the customer invoice
n
Freight and Special Charges may be for the order header or order line.
a
a l
The user has the ability to apply the charges to the order manually, through order import, an
open API or automatically based on the modifier setup.
Costs
r n
e
Freight Costs are the actual costs incurred for the movement of goods that the carrier is moving
t
In
and is billed to OM Shipping.
Freight Costs include, but are not limited to: freight cost, handling charge, insurance,
l e
import/export license fees and miscellaneous changes, such as, restocking fees, return fees,
c
miscellaneous fees and charges for late payment. These miscellaneous charges are standard
r a
seeded values. In order to apply these charges to the order, the user must setup a modifier type
of Freight and Special Charges.
O
Shipping
The main setup difference between freight charges and freight costs is where the user applies
the charges. Shipping captures the freight costs and passes them through to OM; OM uses
them as a basis for applying freight charges to the customer invoice.
For freight charges, the user defines a modifier to setup the attributes in order to apply the
charges to the order.
For freight costs, the user defines a cost type, such as, Freight, and applies the costs at the time
of shipment.
A cut-off point exists for processing charges to a customer invoice. The shipper has the ability
to enter freight and special charges at any time. However, only those costs entered prior to
Ship Confirm will qualify for processing with the customer invoice.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
• Logical grouping of reports for:

The Pick Release Process
The Ship Confirm Process
• Use seeded Document Sets
• Define new Document Sets
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Document > Document Sets
d O
Specify if the document set you’re creating is for the Pick Release or Ship Confirm process.
n
Select from the LOV the reports you want to attach to the Document Set.
a
a l
Use the sequence field to define the printing order for the reports attached to the document set.
There are three seeded document sets that you can use immediately.
• Pick Release Documents
r n
t e
• All Shipping Documents
• Pack Slip Only
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Guided Demonstration – Define Document Sets
(USA)
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Documents > Document Sets
1. Enter a name and description for the new document set.
2. Select the usage for the document set:

− Pick Release: For printing at pick release.
− Ship Confirm: For printing at ship confirm.
Optionally, enter the effective stop date for the document set.
3. The default printing method is parallel. This submits the reports for printing separately, each
with a different request ID. If one of the reports in the document set fails to print, the other
reports still print.
4. In the Sequence field, enter a number that prioritizes the printing order within the document
set. For example, if you enter a 1 in the Sequence field, it is printed first.
5. Select the report name to be included in the document set.

n l y
6. Save your work.
To edit document sets

e O
7. Navigate to the Shipping Document Sets window.
U s
8. Query an existing document set.
A I
9. O
Edit the existing effective dates, sequence of documents, or documents contained within the
d
document set.
a n
10. Save your work.
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Choose Printers
Choose Printers
Printer 1
Profile Hierarchy
Pick Slips
User
Printer 2
Responsibility
Packing Slips Application

Printer 3
Site
n l y
Mailing Labels
e O
U s
Choose Printers
A I
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Documents > Choose Printers
d
Assign your shipping documents and reports to specific printers.
O
n
Printers can be assigned on multiple levels; User, Responsibility, Applications and Site. If set
a
a l
at the User level each user could print to a different printer. If set at the Site level anyone
generating the report would be directed to the same printer.
n
Choose the Document tab to display all documents assigned to a printer, and the printers tab to
r
e
display all printers assigned to a document.
t
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
• Define Roles
Edit
View Only
Disable
• Grant Privileges
n l y
e O
U s
Roles and User Security
A I
Define Roles
d O
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Grants & Roles Definitions > Define Roles
n
Define shipping roles such as Shipping Manager, Shipping Clerk, and Customer Service,
a
Stops, Deliveries, and Lines.
a l
specifying access levels of Edit, View or None (disable) to 60+ actions defined for Trips,
Grants
r n
e
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Grants & Roles Definitions > Grants
t
In
Next grant access to Shipping Roles for each combination of Role and User.
Warehouse is an optional value. A blank warehouse grants a user the same role across all
l e
organizations. Generally a user should only have a single active grant per warehouse.
c
r a
O
Shipping
Guided Demonstration – Define Roles
(USA)
(N) > Shipping > Setups > Grants and Role Definitions > Define Role
1. Enter a name for your Role.
• Enter a description for your role.
2. Click on the Trips tab.
3. Select the access of Edit, view or none for the entries on the Trips tab.
4. Uncheck any of the checkboxes to restrict individual actions within a tab.
5. Use the Disable button to quickly block all the activities within a tab.
6. Use the Enable button to quickly enable all the activities within a tab.
7. Click on the Stops tab.
8. Select the access of Edit, view or none for the entries on the Stops tab.
n l y
e O
10. Click on the Deliveries tab.
U s
12. Uncheck any of the checkboxes to restrict individual actions within a tab. A I
13. Click on the Lines/LPNs tab.
d O
a n
a l
r n
16. Save your work.
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Guided Demonstration – Grant Access to Roles
(USA)
(N) > Shipping > Setups > Grants and Role Definitions > Grants
1. Select a User from the LOV.
2. Select a Role from the LOV.
3. Select or Organization code if the Grants are only applicable to one organization.
4. Enter a Start date to phase in the Grants.
5. Enter an End Date to phase out a grant.
6. Use the View Role button to see how the role you selected was setup.
7. Use the Define Role to setup a new Role.
8. Continue until you have assigned all of the users to their appropriate role.
9. Save your work.

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Practice - Define Roles
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to create a shipping role that can be used to establish grants
(permissions) to shipping functions.
Assumptions
Tasks
n l y
e O
3. Define a role for your shipping clerks. Disable access to Trips and Stops.
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Solution - Define Roles
Login
Define a Role
(N) > Shipping > Setup > Grants and Role Definitions > Define Roles
3. Name: XX-Clerk.
4. Description: XX Shipping Clerk.
5.
6.
Click on (T) Trips.
Click on (B) Disable Actions.

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
n l y
7. (T) Stops.
e O
8. (B) Disable Actions.
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
n l y
9. Click on (T) Deliveries.
e O
10. Validate that Data Access is Edit.
U s
11. Accept all defaults.
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
n l y
12. Click on (T) Lines/LPNs.
e O
13. Validate that the Data Access is Edit.
U s
14. Accept all defaults.
A I
15. Save .
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Practice - Grant Access to Roles
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to create a shipping role that can be used to establish grants
(permissions) to shipping functions.
Assumptions
or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice. <
Tasks
n l y
e O
3.
4.
Grant the shipping clerk role to the appropriate users.
Click on the View Roles button to access the role definition.

U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Solution -Grant Access to Roles
Login
Grant Role
3. (N) > Shipping > Setup > Grants and Role Definitions > Grants
− User OMSUPER
− Role: XX-Clerk.
− Leave Org. blank.
− Accept Start and End Dates.
4. Save .
n l y
View Roles
e O
5. Click on the View Roles button to access the role definition.
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Agenda
Agenda

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Shipping Programs and APIs
• OM Shipping APIs
• Inventory Interface
• Order Management Interface
n l y
e O
U s
Order Management API
A I
d O
Order Management provides APIs to Shipping to view lines that are eligible for delivery,
planning, picking and shipping. The view returns all open, booked, shippable lines that are not
a n
interfaced to Shipping. When an order line reaches the “Ship Line” workflow activity, Order
Management calls Shipping APIs to indicate that a line is pick eligible and communicate
a l
changes to the line once it is interfaced to Shipping. When a delivery is ship Confirmed,
Shipping calls OM APIs to communicate the event, triggering the line flow to move forward.
Inventory Interface
r n
t e
The Inventory Interface is run to update inventory with the ship confirmation information.
In
Inventory balances are decremented and reservations relieved. This program always spawns
the Order Management Interface. It is very important in the process flow that the inventory
e
c l
Interface complete before the Order management interface to ensure the integrity of the
reservations.
r a
Order Management Interface
OThis program is run to update order management with the ship confirmation information.
Order line shipped quantities will be updated.
Shipping
Summary
Summary

• Understand what makes up the compete shipping
process Define items and item organizations
• Perform a Pick Release
• Ship Confirm picked orders
• Perform the necessary Shipping Setups
• Understand Shipping’s APIs and Interfaces
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Shipping
Overview of Oracle
Receivables Process
Chapter 12
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Overview of Oracle Receivables Process

Chapter 12 - Page 1
Overview of Oracle
Receivables Process
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 12 - Page 2
Objectives
Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to

do the following:
• Explain where the Receivables processing is
positioned within the Order to Cash Lifecycle
• Describe the overall Receivables Process
• Discuss the key areas in the Receivables Process
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 12 - Page 3

Transfer Ordering/Pricing
Accounting
to General
Scheduling
Ledger
Ordering
Cash
Management Shipping
Accounting
Collecting
Receipts AutoInvoice
to
Receivables
n l y
Invoicing
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 12 - Page 4
Overview of Receivables in the Order to Cash Process
Overview of Receivables in the

Order to Cash Process
Receivables
Imported through Transactions Manual Creation

AutoInvoice
Cash
Receipt
Transfer to
n l y
Management
O
General Ledger
e
U s
Overview of Receivables in the Order to Cash Process
A I
Receivables can generate transactions from imported data brought through the AutoInvoice
O
program from Oracle Order Management, Oracle Service, Oracle Projects, and legacy systems.
Transactions may also be created manually in the Receivables application. After being
d
a n
completed the transaction information is ready to be transferred to the General Ledger.
Receipts that have been entered and remitted are available to be used by Cash Management to
they are entered and saved.

a l
reconcile bank statements. Receipts are available to be transferred to the General Ledger after
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 12 - Page 5
Overview of the Receivables Process
Transactions Review and Print and Send

Correct Data Invoices
Transfer to G/L Enter Receipts Collect Payments n l y

e O
U s
A I
The transactions are created either by importing them or by manually creating them. The
O
transactions can then be reviewed and corrected before being completed. Once completed, they
are ready to be printed and sent to the customer for payment. However, there is a system option
d
a n
Allow Changes to Printed Transactions, which will allow the correction of printed transactions
as well. Then the transactions go through the collection process. Once collected, the receipts
a l
are enter and applied. The transactions can be transferred to the General Ledger once they are
completed. Finally, the receipts can be transferred once they are completely entered.
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 12 - Page 6
Overview of Receivables Integration

Item
Information Orders &
Shipment
Inventory Order Management
Orders Contracts
Legacy Receivables Service
General
Accounting Receipts
Cash n l y
Ledger O
Management
e
U s
A I
Inventory sends item information to Receivables for any manually created transactions,
O
although no inventory is decremented from any transactions created or modified in
Receivables. Transactions can be created by importing data from Order Management (which
d
a n
may include orders from the CRM Suite of products), other applications and legacy systems.
Receivables sends accounting information to the General Ledger. Receipts are available for
bank reconciliation in Cash Management.
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 12 - Page 7
Overview of the Transaction Process
Standard Transaction
Copy
Review and make corrections
Valid Invalid
transaction transaction
Complete, print and send to customer Void Delete
Enter receipt Interface to

n l y
General Ledger
e O
U s
A I
Transactions can be copied in Receivables. A standard transaction would follow the path of
O
being reviewed, corrected, completed, printed, and sent to the customer. A receipt would be
entered against the transaction. The accounting information would be transferred to the General
d
Ledger after the transaction was completed.
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 12 - Page 8
Overview of Other Invoice Operations
Original Invoice Invoice with Rules
Invoice Accounting Invoice

n l y
Copies Rules Rules
e O
U s
A I
You can use an invoice to make copies. This process can be applied for invoices which will be
the same over a period of time.
d O
Invoices can be created with or without rules. Invoices with rules can be imported or manually
a n
created. The accounting rule indicates when revenue recognition should take place. The
invoicing rule indicates whether to bill in advance (the first period) or to bill in arrears (the last
period).
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 12 - Page 9
Overview of Adjustments
Adjustment Approval limit Validation Approved

entry $500 process or Pending
n l y
e O
U s
A I
Adjustments are entered into the system and proceed through a validation process before being
O
approved. Adjustments can increase or decrease the remaining balance. Each user can have a
different approval limit. If the adjustment is within the approval limit it is automatically
d
user with the appropriate approval limit.
a n
approved. If it exceeds the approval limit it is placed in a pending status until approved by a
be adjusted.
a l
Manual adjustments are created against one transaction. You select the transaction you want to
r n
Automatic adjustments can be made against a group of transactions. You set criteria options to
t e
limit which transactions are selected by the system to be adjusted.
e In
c l
r a
O

Overview of the AutoInvoice Process
Invoice Data Interface Tables Invoices
n l y
Corrected Records Interface Exceptions
e O
U s
A I
Invoice data can be sourced from a number of locations for example: Order Management,
Contracts, and legacy systems.
d O
When the data is brought into the interface tables errors are pushed to the interface exceptions
table to be corrected.
a n
Correct data gets pushed into Receivables as invoices.
a l
AutoInvoice Exceptions: Errors are sent to the interface exceptions table where they can be
n
corrected. Once corrected, they are can be processed into invoices.
r
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Overview of Receipts and Remittances
Enter Receipts Apply to invoice or Update customer

and Remittances customer account balance
n l y
Transfer to G/L Reverse or Reapply Reconcile
e O
U s
Receipts can be entered in one of three ways:
A I
• Manual: Which includes cash and miscellaneous receipts.
• QuickCash: Which includes cash and AutoLockbox.
d O
n
• Automatic: Which includes credit cards, bills of exchange, and direct debits.
a
a l
Remittances are a group of receipts remitted to the same bank similar to bank deposit tickets.
Receipts that are applied to an invoice or customer account can be reversed or reapplied at any
r n
time as long as they have not been purged from the system.
t e
Note: Once entered and saved the receipt information can be transferred to the General Ledger.
In
They do not have to be reconciled or applied to an invoice.
c l e
r a
O

Overview of Collections
Identify past Contact customer Record activity

due items
Resolve n l y
Record bad debt Apply adjustments
O
disputed items
e
U s
A I
Identify past due items by reviewing information on line and printing collection reports.
O
Contact the customer by sending statements, dunning letters or by a telephone call. Record the
customer contact activity and resolve any disputed items. Apply adjustments and record bad
d
debt.
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Overview of Tax
Overview of Tax
Oracle provides ways to set the tax engine:

• Sales tax or VAT tax
• Various tax codes and rates
• Exemptions and exceptions
• Tax groups
• Deferred tax
• Tax reporting n l y
e O
U s
Overview of Tax
A I
Oracle provides the ability to tailor the tax engine to the specific needs of your business.
tables supply an estimated tax.

d O
Receivables is the application where final taxing occurs, all other applications that use the tax
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Summary
Summary
In this module you should have learned how to:

• Explain where the Receivables processing is
positioned within the Order to Cash Lifecycle
• Describe the overall Receivables Process
• Discuss the key areas in the Receivables Process
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Process Invoices
Chapter 13
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Chapter 13 - Page 1
Process Invoices
Process Invoices
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Chapter 13 - Page 2
Objectives
Objectives
After this module, you should be able to:

• Describe the way processing invoices fits into the
Receivables process
• Enter and complete invoices
• Perform other invoice actions
• Correct invoices
• Print transactions and statements
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Chapter 13 - Page 3
Agenda
Agenda
• Overview of invoice process

• Entering and completing invoices
• Performing other invoice actions
• Correcting Invoices
• Printing transactions and statements
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Chapter 13 - Page 4
Oracle Receivables Overview
Create Profile
Classes
Enter Create Print Post

Customers Invoices Invoices Receipts
Use
iReceivables
Perform
Collections n l y
e O
U s
A I
Oracle Receivables provides the capability to create all the necessary transactions to correctly
bill customers, record payments, and perform adjustments to customers accounts. These
d O
transactions include: invoices, credit memos, debit memos, guarantees, deposits, bills
receivable, adjustments, and chargebacks. The Oracle Receivables process consist of several
n
major steps. The Create Invoices and Print Invoices steps will be discussed in this topic.
a
a
terms and invoicing requirements. l
• Create Profile Classes: Defines several default values for customers with similar credit
n
• Enter Customers: Creates information for the customer, defines the addresses for the
r
t e
customer, and the business purpose(s) at each address.
• Create Invoices: Uses AutoInvoice or manually created invoices to bill customers for
e In
goods and services.
• Print Invoices: Produces invoices to mail to customers.
c l
• Use iReceivables: Allows customers and employees to access customer accounts on line
r a to see the status of invoices and receipts and to request credits on line.
• Post Receipts: Permits posting of customer payments as they are received.
O • Perform Collections: Enables collectors to use informational windows and reports to
perform timely and accurate collection activities.
Process Invoices
Chapter 13 - Page 5
Transactions Overview
Import
transactions Calculate
taxes,
derived
Print
GL accounts,
invoices
update
Create customer
manual balances
transactions
Correct,
if necessary
n l y
e O
U s
A I
Transactions can be imported from Oracle Order Management, Projects, Service, Property
O
Management and non-Oracle systems. Transactions can also be created manually. In the
Transaction process, tax can be calculated, General Ledger accounts created, and customer
d
n
balances updated. Invoices can be printed and corrections can be entered, if necessary.
a
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Chapter 13 - Page 6
Transactions Workbench Windows
• Create
• Adjust
Transactions • Credit
Summary • Complete
• Review
• Copy
n l y
e O
U s
Receivables, Vision Operations (USA)
A I
(N) > Transactions > Transactions Summary
d O
The Transactions Summary window consists of a workbench, which has buttons that open
windows where the following can be done:
a n
• Create New transactions.
a
• Create adjustments and credit memos. l
• Complete transactions.
r n
t e
• Review transactions and cash applications.
In
• Copy transactions.
e
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Chapter 13 - Page 7
Guided Demonstration - Review Transaction Workbench
Responsibility: Receivables, Vision Operations (USA)
(N) > Transactions > Transactions Summary (I) Flashlight (T) More
1. Enter Ship-To Customer World of Business, Number 1608 in the More tab region of the
Find window.
2. (B) Find
3. This is a folder window, which can have fields, added and rearranged.
4. (M) Folder > Show Field
5. Explain the Fields across the workbench.

− Source: Specifies automatic or manual batch and invoice numbering and the standard
transaction type.
− Number: Transaction number.
− Bill-To Customer: Name of the Bill-To Customer.
− Class: Type of transaction: Invoice, Debit Memo, Credit Memo, Guarantee, Deposit, or
Chargeback.
− Complete: Shows the transaction is finished.
− Currency: Currency of the transaction.
n l y
− Date: Date of transaction.
− GL Date: Determines the period the transaction was recorded in the General Ledger.
e O
− SalesPerson: The SalesPerson on the transaction.
U s
The GL Date must be in an Open or Future period at the time the transaction is entered.
the payment terms and date of this transaction.

A I
− Terms: Payment terms for the transaction. Receivables calculates the Due Date based on
− Type: Type of the Transaction.
d O
6.
−
Use the buttons on the Workbench to:
a n
Add new and update existing invoices, commitments, and debit memos.
−
− Complete transactions.
a l
Copy invoices, create adjustments and credit memos.
−
r n
Reviewing installments and applications.
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Chapter 13 - Page 8
Agenda
Agenda

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Chapter 13 - Page 9
Invoice Entry Methods
Invoices from Oracle Order

Management or legacy systems Oracle Receivables
Run
AutoInvoice
Manual n l y
Invoices Data Entry
e O
U s
Enter standard invoices according to your business needs:
A I
d O
• AutoInvoice: Import transactions form Oracle Order Management or legacy systems.
• Manual Invoices: Enter transactions for invoices that do not originate in a feeder system,
n
such as invoices for miscellaneous items, services, or freight.
a
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Creating a Standard Invoice Manually
Enter invoice Enter sales credit

Enter invoice
header information lines
Complete n l y
Enter freight lines
Use AutoAccounting
to create accounts invoice
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Transactions > Transactions
d O
A Standard Invoice is created manually in Oracle Receivables using the following process.
n
• Enter invoice header information: Identify the customer and type of invoice. Can be
a
modified to include transaction source.
a l
• Enter invoice lines: Record goods and services to be invoiced.
r n
• Enter sales credit: Optionally, record sales commissions.
t e
• Enter freight lines: Optionally, record freight charges.
In
• Use AutoAccounting to create accounts: Create the General Ledger distribution accounts
by using preconfigured AutoAccouning Rules.
e
l
• Complete Invoice: Finish the process and prepare the invoice for printing.
c
r a
O
Process Invoices
Invoice Components
Invoice Components
Invoice Header
Number Source Class Type GL Date
Customer Information
Ship-To Address Bill-To Address
Lines
Item Price Quantity

n l y
e O
U s
Invoice Components
A I
d O
Invoices consist of three major components, Invoice Header, Customer Information, and Lines.
Invoice Header
a n
a l
• Number: If the Batch Source specifies automatic invoice numbering then Receivables
assigns a number when you save the transaction or you can entered the number manually.
r n
• Source: Sets default values and AutoInvoice options. Controls numbering. Turn on
e
Automatic as well as entering the range of numbers for the system to use.
t
In
• Class: Provides a dropdown list of classes of transactions, chargeback, credit memo, debit
memo, deposit, guarantee, and invoice.
l e
• Type: Determines whether Receivables amounts are recorded and posted to the General
c
Ledger.
r a
• GL Date: Sets the General Ledger period for posting of transaction distributions.
O
Process Invoices
Customer Information
• Ship-To Address: (Optional) Ship goods or provide services at this customer address.
• Bill-To Address: Send the invoice to this customer address.
Lines
• Item: Goods or services provide to the customer.
• Price: Unit price or total amount to be charged the customer.
• Quantity: Amount ordered or one when entering the total amount.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Transactions Window Tabs
Main
More
Remit To,
Sales Paying
Customer
Notes
Commitment
Credit
n l y
e O
U s
A I
O
The tabs in the Transaction window is where the following information is entered:
d
• Main: Customer Bill-to, Ship-to, Due Date, Terms, Salesperson and Commitment.
a n
• More: Invoicing Rule, Print Option, Default Tax, Status, Finance Charges, Cross
a l
Reference, Original Transaction, Agreement, Dispute Amount and Date, Special
Instructions, Comments, Document Number, Print Date, and Purchase Order information.
r n
• Remit to, Sales: Remit-to-address, Sold To Customer and Number, and Sales Territory.
e
• Paying Customer: Paying Customer Number and Location, Payment method, Customer
t
In
Bank information, and Expiration Date.
• Notes: Date, Source, and Memo.
l e
• Commitment: Effective Dates, Amount, Item, Memo Line, Description , and Transaction.
c
(Used with Commitments).
r a
• Credit: Reason, Customer Reference and Date, Rules and Split Term Method, Credited
Transactions Source, Reference, Amount, GL Date, Number, Bill-to, Balance Due, and
O Transaction Date. (Used with Credit Memos).
Process Invoices
Required Transaction Information
• Date
• Source
• Class
• Type
• GL Date
• Bill-to
• Terms
• Remit-to
n l y
e O
U s
A
A number of fields are required during invoice entry. They include the following:I
• Date: Transaction date.
d O
• Source: List of values showing where transaction originates. New sources can be added
to the list of values.
a n
Deposit, or Chargeback.
a l
• Class: Classifies the transaction as an Invoice, Credit Memo, Debit Memo, Guarantee,
n
• Type: Determine whether a transaction updates open receivables, can be posted to your
r
t e
General Ledger, Receivables calculates tax, and other defaults are entered.
• GL Date: Enters the current date the transaction will use when transferring to the General
Ledger.
e In
c l
• Bill-to: Determines where the final document is sent.
• Terms: Records the payment terms for the transaction.
r a
• Remit-To: Provides your address information for the payment remittance.
O
Process Invoices
Entering Invoice Dates

• Enter invoice dates in any period. The invoice
date plus the payment terms determine the due
date.
• Enter General Ledger dates in open and future
accounting periods. This date determines when
the journal entry can be created.
Open Closed
Available for entry

Future
Available for entry Not available

n l y
and posting to GL
e O
U s
A
• An invoice date can be entered any time. This determines the due date only. I
d O
• The General Ledger (GL) date determines when the transaction can be transferred to the
General Ledger. The GL date defaults to the transaction date if it is in a open period.
a n
Otherwise, it defaults to the last day of the month of the current open period.
• The Receivables calendar can be opened or closed independently of the General Ledger
l
calendar. (The General Ledger calendar is shared by Receivables so no separate setup is
a
required.)
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Transaction Defaults
Transaction Type
Transaction
Source
AutoAccounting
Accounting Customer n l y
Rules
O
Record
e
U s
A I
Transaction defaults save data entry time and reduce errors. There are several sources for these
defaults.
• Transaction Source defaults:
d O
- Transaction type
a n
- Transaction numbering
• Transaction Type defaults:
a l
- Transaction class
r n
t e
- Payment terms (if not set at the customer)
- Accounting
In
- Credit memos for invoices
e
l
- Invoice information for commitments
c
r a
• AutoAccounting defaults:
- Accounts for transactions
O - Validates Accounts
Process Invoices
• Customer Record defaults:
- Ship-to and bill-to address
- Payment terms
- Salesperson
• Accounting Rules default from:
- An item
- A standard memo line
• Statement cycles default from the customer profile class.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Standard Invoice Line Types
Inventory Item Standard Memo:

Non-Inventory
Item and
Services
Free Form:
Special Items
n l y
and Services
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Transactions > Transactions > (B) Line Items
d O
There are three types of standard invoice line types that can be used during invoice entry.
n
• Inventory item: Enter items available in inventory, using a list of values.
a
a l
• Standard Memo line: Enter non-inventory products or services, such as extended
warranties or maintenance contracts, using a list of values.
r n
• Free Form line: Enter a description.
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Entering Freight Invoices or Lines
AutoAccounting
Invoice
Level
01-110-7340-0000-000
Line
Level
General
Ledger
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Transactions > Transactions > (B) Line Items
d O
If the transaction type assigned to this invoice allows freight charges, enter freight amounts.
n
Bill freight charges for the entire invoice or for each line:
a
a l
• Click the Freight button in the Transactions window to enter at invoice level.
• Click the Freight button in the Lines window to enter at lines level.
r n
Note: If you click the freight button at invoice level, then the freight charges apply to the
e
entire invoice. If click the freight charge at line level, it will apply to that particular line.
t
In
AutoAccounting determines the default freight account.
Note: Users can calculate and report tax on freight by creating inventory items with the type of
l e
Freight. AutoAccounting identifies these standard invoice lines with an inventory item type of
c
Freight and derives your General Ledger accounts based on the rules you have defined for
r a
freight transactions.
O
Process Invoices
Entering Sales Credits
Require
Salesperson
AutoAccounting
Recalculates
Revenue Account
Enter in
Sales Credit
window
Revenue or
Non Revenue
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Setup > System > System Options
O
• If the Require Salesperson check box in the Miscellaneous tab of the System Options
d
window is selected, a salesperson must be assigned to each invoice.
Receivables
a n
a l
(N) > Transactions > Transactions > (B) Sales Credits
• Use the Sales Credits window to allocate sales credit among salespeople, and record both
r n
revenue (credit based on invoice lines) and non-revenue sales credit (credit in excess of
t e
your revenue sales credit such as bonuses or incentives). This information defaults to
line-level sales credits.
e In
Note: The percentage of revenue sales credits must add up to 100%.
• AutoAccounting will recalculate the revenue account assignment.
c l
• Additional non-revenue sales credits (above 100%) can be assigned for bonus or
r a incentive purposes.
• Allocate different percentages or to different salespeople by line, using the For This Line
O region of the Sales Credits window. Access this window by clicking Sales Credits in the
Lines window.
Process Invoices
Completing Transactions
Lines
Distributions =
Total
Open or Future
Period
One or More
Lines n l y
e O
U s
A I
O
When all required information has been entered, click the Complete button to complete (finish)
the invoice.
d
a n
• Payment schedules and aged receivable amounts are calculated when the Complete
button is selected.
a l
• Completed transactions can be transferred to the General Ledger.
r n
• Only completed transactions can be printed.
e
The requirements for Completing an invoice:
t
In
• An invoice must have at least one line, or at the header level be a freight invoice.
• The General Ledger date of the invoice must be in an open or future period.
l e
• The invoice sign must match the sign of the transaction type.
c
• The sum of distributions for each line must equal the invoice line amounts.
r a
• If Calculate Tax for transaction type is set to Yes, tax is required on each line.
O
Process Invoices
Guided Demonstration - Enter Invoice
1. Enter Manual as the Source and Invoice as the Class.
2. Enter Customer Business World.
The San Jose Ship-to and Bill-to sites as well as the payment terms and sales person default
in from the Customer record.
3. (B) Line Items
4. Enter Item.
− Item: CM13139
− Qty: 1
− Unit Price: 100
− Tax Code: Location
5. Close the Line Items window.
6. (B) Complete
n l y
Complete creates the accounting entries and prepares the invoice for transfer to General
Ledger.
e O
7. (B) Sales Credits
U s
8. Reduce Howard Sprague’s percentage to 60%
A I
9. Add Barry Lewis with a percentage of 40%
d O
n
10. Answer Yes in the Decision box asking if you want to recalculate the accounting.
a
11. Close the Sales Credits window.
a l
r n
12. (M) Tools > View Accounting (B) T Accounts
t e
In
The View Accounting window shows the accounting for the transaction. The T Accounts
button permits viewing the accounting for the transaction in both the T Accounts format and
e
l
the Activity Summary format.
c
r a
O
Process Invoices
Practice - Enter and Complete an Invoice
Overview
In this practice you will enter and complete a two-line invoice for Consulting Services for the
customer you created earlier or World of Business.
• Enter Invoice Header information.
• Enter Invoice Line Information.
• Complete the Invoice
Assumptions
• Your instructor will provide login information.
• Replace XX with the number provided by your instructor or your initials.
• Use Receivables, Vision Operations (USA) or comparable Super User Receivables

responsibility.
n l y
Tasks
e O
1.
U
Enter Invoice Header Information with Manual as Source, Invoice as Class and Transaction s
addresses.
A I
type, and your customer you created earlier or World of Business Ship-To and Bill-to
2.
O
The customer is being billed for 2 consulting assignments. Enter the following invoice lines
associated with them.
d
Line # Item #
an Qty Unit Price Tax
al
1 CS03755 10 1500 Location Based
2 CS32698
r n 5 1750 Location Based
3. Complete the Invoice.
I n te
c l e
r a
O
Process Invoices
Solution - Enter and Complete an Invoice
Enter Invoice Header Information
1. Navigate to the Transactions window.
• (N) > Transactions > Transactions
2. Select Manual as the Source.
3. Select Invoice as Class.
4. Verify that the Transaction Type of Invoice defaults in.
5. Enter your customer or World of Business as the name in the Ship-To and Bill-To name.
The address information may default in. If not, select the San Jose sites for World of
Business or your entered sites for your customer.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e
Enter Invoice Lines In
c l
6.
r aNavigate to the Lines window.
O • (N) > Transactions > Transactions (B) Line Items
Process Invoices
7. Enter each line from the table.
8. Click on Tax Button and make sure your “location based tax” was calculated. If not, use
your list of values to select any tax code with a rate.
9. (I) Save.
n l y
Complete the Invoice
e O
10. Close the Lines window.
U s
11. (B) Complete.
A I
• Record the Invoice Number: ___________________
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Creating Invoice Batches
Pounds Yen
Invoice Date
Defaults Different Currencies
Payment by
Invoice Batch
Control Total = Actual Total Identifies the Source n l y

e O
U s
A I
(N) > Transactions > Batches
d O
Invoice Batching can be used to create groups of invoices Batching provides checks and
n
balances not available in a single invoice. Some of the elements of a batch are:
a
a l
• The batch date defaults to the invoice date.
• If a batch is entered, Oracle Receivables uses the source assigned to the batch for each of
the invoices.
r n
e
• Batches must match control and actual invoice counts and amounts.
t
In
• Actual count and amount are updated as each invoice is entered.
• A batch can contain invoices with different currencies.
l e
• Invoices can be printed by batch.
c
r a
• Oracle Receivables uses invoice batches to import invoice data.
• Batch information identifies the originating system when importing transactions.
O
Process Invoices
Agenda
Agenda

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Creating Copies of Invoices

January
April
Model
transaction
July
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N )> Transactions > Copy Transactions
d O
Use the Copy Transactions window to create recurring invoices for products and services sold
n
on a regular basis. A model invoice is used to copy a series of invoices in future periods.
a
Example:
a l
• Business Needs: A customer is billed for the same service every month.
r n
• Solution: For the first month, enter a new invoice that refers to the billed service. This
e
becomes the model invoice for the following months.
t
In
• The model transaction must be complete.
• Once the model transaction is copied, changes to the model transaction do not affect the
l e
copied transaction.
c
• The model transaction should be the open or closed transaction that exactly matches the
r a transaction(s) to recur.
O
Process Invoices
Using Recurring Rules
Select one of the following rules:

• Annually
• Semi-Annually
• Quarterly
• Bi-Monthly
• Monthly
• Weekly
• Days
• Single Copy
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Transactions > Copy Transactions
d O
Oracle Receivables determines the date and frequency of the copied transactions, using the
n
rule, first transaction date, and number of times specified.
a
a l
• You cannot update the recurring schedule after it has been saved.
• Oracle Receivables creates all invoice copies at one time.
r n
• Invoices that are created in unopened periods are created as incomplete.
t e
• If the batch source for the model invoice has automatic transaction numbering turned on,
In
Oracle Receivables automatically numbers each recurring transaction.
• Each recurring transaction uses the batch source that is assigned to the model transaction.
c l e
r a
O
Process Invoices
Select one of the following rules to create the invoices on the specific schedule:
• Annually: Once a year.
• Semi-Annually: Same day every six months.
• Quarterly: Same day every three months.
• Bi-Monthly: Same day every other month.
• Monthly: Same day every month.
• Weekly: Every seven days.
• Days: Interval based on the number of days entered.
• Single Copy: One copy.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Guided Demostration - Copy Invoices
(N) > Transactions > Copy Transactions (K) F11
1. Query Invoice 10006861 for Business World using F11, Ctrl F11.
2. Select Monthly as the Rule.
3. Enter 6 in the number of times to create 6 copies.
4. Accept the default GL date.
5. (I) Save.
The six monthly transactions appear in the bottom of the screen.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Practice - Copy Invoice
Overview
In this practice, you will use World of Business or the customer you defined to create recurring
invoices. Your customer has advised that they will be ordering the same consulting services as
previously ordered on a monthly basis for the next six months.
Copy Invoice from the previous practice.
View report showing new invoices created.
Assumptions

responsibility.
n l y
Tasks
e O
1.
2.
Copy the Invoice created in the previous practice.
Review the report showing the newly created invoices. U s

A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Solution - Copy Invoice
Copy the Invoice
1. Navigate to the Copy Transactions Form.
• (N) Transactions > Copy Transactions
2. Query your invoice from previous practice.
3. Define the recurring schedule with a Rule of Monthly. Number of Months is 6.
4. Accept all other fields as they default.
5. (I) Save.
• Write down invoice numbers. ______________________________________________
Notice how the system automatically numbers all of the new transactions in a sequential
order.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
Review Report
O
6. Go to the concurrent manager and view the completed report.
Process Invoices
• (N) > (M) View > Requests (B) Find (B) View Output
7. If your Concurrent Request completes with a “Warning” or “Error,” (B) View Log and
review. If this occurs, contact your instructor for assistance.
A warning can occur when the future periods are not open or future enterable so not all of
the invoices are completed.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Creating Invoices with Rules
Creating Invoices with Rules
Fixed or Journal
variable entry
Accounting rule
Advance
or arrears
Invoicing rule
Invoice Revenue
Recognition
program
01.100.200.4500.000.0000
01.110.220.4550.000.0000
01.220.220.4700.000.0000
Journal
entry n l y
AutoAccounting
e O
U s
Creating Invoices for Services
A I
(N) > Transactions > Transactions > (B) Line Items > (B) Rules
d O
Accounting Rules determine the revenue recognition schedules for invoices, while invoicing
a n
rules determine when to recognize revenue for Receivables invoices.Invoicing Rules record the
receivable in the first (Bill in Advance) or last (Bill in Arrear) period of the service.
a l
• You can assign invoicing rules to invoices that you manually enter or import into
n
Receivables through AutoInvoice.
r
e
• Once the invoice is saved, you cannot update an invoicing rule.
t
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Accounting Rules
Accounting Rules
Accounting Rules determines when to Recognize

Revenue:
Accounting, Fixed Duration:

Over all periods based on a
percentage or evenly.
Accounting, Variable Duration:

Percentage 1st Period, remaining
amount evenly over remaining
periods.
n l y
e O
U s
Defining Accounting Rules
A I
(N) > Setup > Transactions > Accounting Rules
Accounting rules determine when to recognize revenue amounts.
d O
n
• Use Accounting, Fixed Duration type to recognize revenue over a specific number of
a
Default is even distribution.
a l
periods. Revenue can be spread evenly or a percentage can be specified for each period.
n
• Use the Accounting, Variable Duration type to recognize revenue by a percentage for the
r
t e
first period. The remaining revenue is spread evenly across the number of periods that
you specify during transaction entry.
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Assigning Accounting Rules to Invoice Lines
Assigning Accounting Rules

to Invoice Lines
Accounting, Fixed Duration

Accounting, Variable Duration
# of
Accounting
Recognize Revenue
Periods
n l y
= 1st GL Date
e O
U s
Assigning Accounting Rules to Invoice Lines
A I
(N) > Transactions > Transactions > (B) Line Items > (B) Rules
Each invoice line can have a different accounting rule.
d O
n
Oracle Receivables uses the First GL Date field in the Transactions window to determine when
a
to start recognizing revenue.
a l
The number of periods in which revenue is recognized is determined by the value in the
n
Number of Accounting Periods field in the Transactions window.
r
e
• Value defaults from fixed rule.
t
In
• Value must be entered for variable rule.
c l e
r a
O
Process Invoices
Using Invoices With Rules
Using Invoices With Rules
Business Need Solution

Enter invoices for services Enter invoices with rules
provided over 12 months either in the Transactions
and recognize revenue as window or through
the service is provided. AutoInvoice.
Bill customers for the Assign invoices a Bill in
invoices before recognizing Advance invoicing rule.
all of the revenue.
Bill customers for invoices Assign invoices a Bill in
after recognizing all of the Arrears invoicing rule.
revenue.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Example of Billing in Advance

Invoice rule =
Bill in Advance
Dr. Receivables 3000
January Cr. Unearned rev. 3000
Dr. Unearned rev. 1000
Cr. Revenue 1000
Invoice
February Dr. Unearned rev. 1000

Cr. Revenue 1000
Dr. Unearned rev. 1000

March
Cr. Revenue 1000
Accounting rule = 3-Month

n l y
Fixed Duration
e O
U s
A I
Because you are billing the customer for the entire invoice in the first accounting period, the
or support has been provided.

d O
offset account must be Unearned Revenue. Revenue is considered earned only when services
a n
With the Bill in Advance invoicing rule, Oracle Receivables updates the GL (General Ledger)
Date and invoice date of the invoice to the first accounting period for the accounting rule.
l
For example, if the GL Date of the invoice was originally 01–JAN–02, and revenue was spread
a
n
across 3 months, Oracle Receivables uses the GL Date of the invoice to 01–JAN–02.
r
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Example of Billing in Arrears

Invoice rule =
Bill in Arrears
January Dr. Unbilled receivable 1000

Cr. Revenue 1000
Invoice
Dr. Unbilled receivable 1000
February Cr. Revenue 1000
Dr. Unbilled receivable 1000

Cr. Revenue 1000
March Dr. Receivable 3000
Cr. Unbilled receivable 3000
Accounting rule = 3-Month n l y

Fixed Duration
e O
U s
A I
Because Billing in Arrears bills the customer for the entire invoice in the last accounting
period, the offset account must be Unbilled Receivables.
d O
With the Bill in Arrears invoicing rule, Oracle Receivables updates the GL Date and invoice
a n
date of the invoice to the last accounting period for the accounting rule.
For example, if the GL Date of the invoice was originally 01–JAN–02, and revenue was spread
l
across 3 months, Oracle Receivables changes the GL Date and invoice date of the invoice to
a
01–MAR–02.
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Guided Demonstration - Use Rules
1. Enter Manual as the Source and Invoice as the Class.
2. Enter Customer Business World.
The San Jose Ship-to and Bill-to sites as well as the payment terms and sales person
default in from the Customer record.
3. (T) More
4. Select In Advance in the Invoicing Rule field.
5. (B) Line Items
6. Enter Item.
− Description: 1 Year Support Agreement (from the list of values of Standard Memo
Lines)
−
−
Qty: 1
Tax Code: Location
n l y
7.
− Close the Line Items window.
(B) Complete
e O
Complete creates the accounting entries and prepares the invoice for the Revenue
U s
Recognition Program and Transfer to General Ledger.
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Deferred Accounting Rules
• You can defer all revenue to an unearned revenue

account by assigning a deferred accounting rule
to an invoice.
• You later recognize this revenue using the
Revenue Accounting feature.
• For use only with the Bill In Advance invoicing
rule.
Deferred Revenue
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
Use Deferred Accounting Rules to recognize revenue on demand using the Revenue
a n
Accounting feature. Deferred Accounting Rules are enabled by selecting the Deferred Revenue
checkbox on the Invoicing and Accounting Rules window.
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Revenue Recognition Program
Revenue Recognition Program
Deferred Revenue =
Unearned Revenue
Revenue
Recognition
Bill in Advance =
program
Unearned Revenue
Bill in Arrears =
Unbilled Receivables
Journal
entry n l y
e O
U s
Running the Revenue Recognition Program
A I
(N) > Control > Accounting > Revenue Recognition
O
• Accounting distributions are created only after you run the Revenue Recognition
program.
d
a n
- For Bill in Advance, the offset account to Accounts Receivable is Unearned
Revenue.
a l
- For Bill in Arrears, the offset account to Revenue is Unbilled Receivables.
r n
• Accounting distributions are created for all periods when Revenue Recognition runs.
e
• When you use deferred accounting rules, the Revenue Recognition program creates a
t
In
single distribution per line that posts to an unearned revenue GL account.
• Submit the Revenue Recognition program manually through the Run Revenue
c l e
Recognition window.
• Submit the Revenue Recognition program automatically when posting to Oracle General
r a Ledger.
• The program processes revenue by transaction, rather than by accounting period.
O • Only new transactions are selected each time the process is run.
Process Invoices
Guided Demonstration - Run Revenue Recognition
(N) > Control > Accounting > Revenue Recognition > Single Request > (B) OK
1. Select Revenue Recognition from the List of Values in the Name Field.
2. Accept the default parameters.
3. (B) OK
4. (B) Submit
5. Answer No in the Decision Box asking if you want to submit another request.
6. (M) View > Requests (B) Find (B) View Output
The Revenue Recognition Program Execution Report shows the total amount of the
accounting entries created by the Program.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Making Adjustments Using Revenue Accounting
Making Adjustments Using Revenue

Accounting
Completed
Invoices & Earned
Credit Memos
Unearned
Transfer
Sales
Credits Add
Non-revenue
Sales
Credits n l y
e O
U s
Making Receivables, Vision Operations (USA)
A I
(N) > Control > Accounting > Revenue Accounting
d O
(N) > Transactions > Transactions or (N) Transactions > Credit Transactions
n
The Revenue Accounting feature lets you adjust revenue.
a
• Earn or unearned revenue
a
• You can also adjust sales credits l
r n
- Transfer revenue sales credits between Salespersons (maintaining the 100% total)
t e
- Add Non-revenue sales credits
e In
• You can adjust completed invoices and credit memos.
• You can make adjustments at the transaction or line level.
c l
• Receivables uses AutoAccounting to generate the required accounting distributions.
r a
• Use the Revenue Accounting and Sales Credits window to manually perform these
adjustments.
O • Use the Revenue Adjustment API to automatically perform these adjustments.
Process Invoices
Agenda
Agenda

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Invoice Transaction Flow

Deposit Guarantee Standard invoice
Copy
Print and send invoice to customer
Invalid
Correct invoice Underinvoice Overinvoice
transaction
Void Delete
Process and print
Enter receipt
n l y
Generate statement and Interface to Oracle General Ledger
e O
U s
A I
In Oracle Receivables, you can review and correct invoice, debit memo, deposit, guarantee,
O
credit memo, on-account credit memo, and chargeback information for transactions you enter
manually or import into Receivables using AutoInvoice. This slide shows an overview of the
d
• Correct Invoice
a n
Invoice process and the four scenarios that can occur when transactions need correcting.
• Underinvoice
a l
• Overinvoice
r n
• Invalid transaction
- Void t e
- Delete
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Invoice Correction Methods
Invoices
Underinvoicing Overinvoicing Invalid

Update invoice Update invoice Transactions
Debit memo
Adjustment
Credit memo
On-account credit
Adjustment
Void
Delete
n l y
Refund
e O
U s
A I
Overinvoicing: Occurs when an invoice is generated for an amount that is greater than the
customer, or the invoice can be updated.

d O
amount actually due. The difference between the amounts can be credited or refunded to the
a n
Underinvoicing: Occurs when an invoice is generated for an amount that is less than the
amount actually due. The difference between the amounts can be debited against the customer,
or the invoice can be updated.
a l
n
Invalid Transactions: Transactions that were created in error.
r
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Overview of Corrections
Correction Effect on Approval Accounting
Type Invoice Limits Source
Update Changes None Original

Invoice original Transaction
Debit Memo None; None AutoAccounting

new item
Adjustment Activity User Receivables

Activity
Credit Memo New item None Original

applied to Transaction or
original AutoAccounting
(profile option)
On-account
Credit
None;
account only
None AutoAccounting
n l y
e O
U s
A I
Update Invoice: Update the line, tax, and freight amounts on the original invoice before it is
posted.
d O
Debit Memo: Enter a new transaction for additional amounts not invoiced on the original
invoice.
a n
Adjustment: Adjust line, tax, and freight amounts on the original invoice.
a
Credit Memo: Credit a specific invoice. l
n
On-Account Credit: Credit the customer’s account. This credit does not initially apply to a
r
specific invoice.
t e
iReceivables: Disputes an invoice. Enter a requested credit amount or percentage for lines, tax,
In
freight, or total. Credit memo request is routed through the approval process.
e
c l
Note: Debit memos are not directly linked to invoices, but you can enter descriptive references.
Adjustments are linked to invoices.
r a
O
Process Invoices
Overview of Corrections (Continued)
(Continued)
Correction Usage
Type Tax Restriction Entry
Update Automatic Activity Query in

Invoice Transactions
window
Debit Memo Automatic None Transactions

window
Adjustment Manual or Approval Transactions

write-off limits Summary
Credit Memo Automatic None Transactions

Summary
On-account
Credit
Automatic None Transactions
window n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Updating Invoices
Updating Invoices
• Update the original invoice before posting to the

General Ledger and before entering activity.
• Update invoice information through the
Transactions window.
• Use the Transactions workbench to update the
Due Date, PO Number, Salesperson, and Remit-To
Address.
• Update the original invoice amount by:
– Updating the quantity and unit price for
each line
– Updating the original freight amount
n l y
e O
U s
Updating Invoices
A I
d O
Examples of activity that prevent you from updating an invoice are applying a receipt, credit
a n
memo, or commitment against an invoice, or creating an adjustment for the invoice. If the
system option “Allow Changes to Printed Transaction” check box is cleared, then you cannot
update an invoice that has been printed.
a l
n
Use the Update Invoice procedure to correct for overinvoicing as well as underinvoicing.
r
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Creating Debit Memos
Enter in Transaction Window
Import through AutoInvoice
Transaction Type = Debit Memo

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
Debit memos are like invoices, but they are usually created for additional charges. You can:
n
• Enter debit memos in the Transactions window.
a
• Import debit memos through AutoInvoice.
a l
• Enter debit memos in the same way as invoices, but use the Debit Memo transaction type.
r n
Debit memos cannot reference a specific invoice number. Generally, invoices should be used
whenever possible.
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Creating Adjustments
Adjustment
entry
Approval limit
$500
Validation
process
Approved
or Pending n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Transactions > Transactions Summary > (B) Adjust
d O
When you create an adjustment Receivables automatically verifies that it is within your
adjustment approval limits.
a n
a l
• If within your assigned approval limit for the currency of that item, Receivables updates
your customer’s balance to reflect the adjustment.
n
• If outside your approval limits, Oracle Receivables creates a pending adjustment with a
r
t e
status of Pending Approval, which will need to be approved by a higher level employee
with the proper approval limit.
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Guided Demonstration - Enter an Adjustment
(N) > Setup > Transactions > Adjustment Limits
1. Enter the following information:

− Username: Operations
− Document Type: Credit Memo
− Reason: Discount
− Currency: USD
− From Amount: -999
− To Amount: 999
2. (I) Save.
3. (N) > Transactions > Transactions Summary > (I) Flashlight
4. Find Transaction Number 10007249 or 10007284.
5. (B) Adjust
6. Enter the following information:

− Activity: Line Adjustment
n l y
− Type: Line
− Amount: -100
e O
7. (I) Save.
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Applying Different Types of Credits
Applied credit memo
Credit Invoice
memo
On-account credit
Credit Customer
memo account
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Transactions > Credit Transactions
d O
• Respond to overinvoicing with credit memos and on-account credits.
n
• Credit memos affect specific invoices; on-account credits affect customer balances.
a
a l
• Credit memos are entered in the Credit Transactions window; On-account credits are
entered in the Transactions window with the transaction class of Credit Memo.
r n
• Credit memos cannot be unapplied or reversed from the invoice once they have been
e
created; On-account credits can be moved.
t
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Credit Memo Options
Credit Memo Options
• Invoice Lines: Credit specific invoice lines.

• Tax only: Enter 100% in the Tax % field, or
remaining tax amount in the Amount field.
• Freight only: Enter amount in the Freight field, or
credit specific lines in the Freight window.
• Invoice, Tax and Freight lines: Enter amount or %
in the Transaction Amounts region of the Credit
Memo window.
Lines
Tax
n l y
Freight
e O
U s
Credit Memo Options
A I
d O
• Use the Credit Balance button to credit 100% of the remaining invoice value.
n
• Use the Credit Lines button to credit a specific line on the invoice with the related tax if
a
applicable.
a l
• If you enter credits in the Transaction Amounts region, the tax, if applicable to that
n
invoice, needs to be adjusted separately. Receivables does not calculate the tax in relation
r
to the lines.
t e
• Enter credit memos for a specific invoice or invoice line.
In
• You can create a credit memo against:
e
c l
- Open invoices.
- Closed invoices.
r a
• Batch credit memos to help identify data entry errors.
O • Reference invoices with no remaining balances to refer credits back to the original
invoices.
Process Invoices
• Use the Receipts window to apply these credits to other items.
• The transaction type of the invoice to be credited must allow over application in case of a
credit memo created for an invoice with an outstanding balance of zero.
• Select an existing invoice in the Credit Transaction field in order to create the credit
memo.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Guided Demonstration - Enter a Credit Memo
1. Enter Transaction Number 10007145 or 10007249.
2. Enter 50% in the Line and Tax fields of the Credit Memo Region.
3. (I) Save
4. (B) Complete
5. (B) Credit Lines to review the effect on the invoice.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Practice - Create a Credit Memo
Overview
In this practice, you will enter a credit memo. The invoice entered for consulting services in the
first practice should have included a 5% discount.
• Create a credit memo.
• View the credit lines.
Assumptions

responsibility.
Tasks
n l y
1. Create a credit memo.
e O
2. View the credit lines and completed the credit memo.
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Solution - Create a Credit Memo
Create Credit Memo
1. Navigate to the Credit Transactions window.
• (N) Transactions > Credit Transactions
2. Find the first invoice number you entered for consulting services. (B) Find.
3. Accept defaults that appear.
4. Source: Manual
The system will auto-generate the credit memo number.
5. Enter Reason: Discount.
6. If the GL date doesn’t default, enter today’s date.
• Notice Balance Due on the Invoice.
7.
8.
In the Line % Field in the Credit Memo Region enter 5.
(I) Save
n l y
• Credit Memo Number: _________________________________________
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
View Credit Lines
n l y
9. (B) Credit Lines
10. Review the credit memo lines to see how the system has pro-rated the credit amount.
e O
Note: 5% of each line item is calculated, not of the unit price or tax.
U s
11. Close the Lines window.
A I
12. Complete the Credit Memo.
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
On-Account Credit Options
• Invoice Lines: Use free-form, standard memo, or

inventory lines in the Transactions window.
• Tax only: Select a standard tax memo line, or enter
a dummy credit memo line in the Credit Memo
Lines region.
• Freight only: Select a standard memo line.
• Invoice, tax, and freight lines: Enter line-level
credits.
Customer
Credit
Memo Account
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
To apply a credit to a customer’s account rather than to an individual invoice:
n
• Enter on-account credits in the Transactions window.
a
• Select transaction class Credit Memo.
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Guided Demonstration - Enter On-Account Credit
1. Enter the following:

− Source: Manual.
− Class: Credit Memo.
− Type: On-Account Credit
− Name: Business World
The San Jose Ship-to and Bill-to sites as well as the payment terms and sales person default
in from the Customer record.
2. (B) Line Items
3. Enter Item.
− Description: Rebate
− Qty: 1
− Unit Price: -100
4.
− Tax Code: Location
Close the Line Items window. n l y

5. (B) Complete.
e O
6. (M) Tools > View Accounting
U s
Review the General Ledger accounting entries.
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Reversing Sales Credits
• Automatically
• Proportionally
• Change with AR: Allow Update of Existing Sales
Credit Profile Option
SALES
CREDIT
Sales Person
n l y
e O
U s
A I
• When crediting any part of an invoice, Oracle Receivables automatically reverses sales
credits assigned to the appropriate salespeople.
d O
• Partial credits against sales credits default proportionately, but can be updated as long as
a n
the sum of sales credits for the line equals the original line credit amount.
• The AR: Allow Update of Existing Sales Credits profile option determines whether a user
l
can update existing sales credits or if additional sales credit records need to be created to
a
maintain an audit trail.
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Creating Refunds
Creating Refunds
• Create a credit memo

• Create a debit memo
• Set up customer as a supplier
• Use the debit memo to enter an invoice in Oracle
Payables
• Create a payment and send to customer
n l y
e O
U s
Creating Refunds
A I
You must create a refund when the customer has already paid an invoice and requests money
back instead of a credit.
d O
Oracle Receivables does not create checks and therefore does not complete the refund process.
refunds.
a n
If Oracle Payables has been installed, you can use the features of the two systems to process
a l
You would use a clearing account to offset the Receivables account in Receivables and the
Payables account in Payables.
r n
t e
If you do not have Payables installed, create a credit memo/debit memo for accounting, and
then send to your check writing system.
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Example: A refund for a customer who returns goods and wants a refund for $200.
• Enter a credit memo in Oracle Receivables to reduce revenue and create an amount due
to the customer.
- Debit Revenue 200 / Credit Receivables 200
• Enter a debit memo in Oracle Receivables to transfer the amount owed to the customer to
a clearing account.
- Debit Receivables 200 / Credit Clearing 200
• Enter an invoice in Oracle Payables to clear the clearing account and create an accounts
payable for the customer.
- Debit Clearing 200 / Credit Payables 200
• Issue a check in Oracle Payables to send the refund to the customer.
- Debit Payables 200 / Credit Cash 200
Instructor Note: You can also use T-accounts to illustrate how to account for a refund.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Voiding Transactions
Void invoices, credit memos, and on-account credits

in response to invalid transactions.
Business Need Solution
Track invoices that are Update the invoice status to

incorrectly entered to determine Incomplete and assign a
whether this is a data entry transaction type that has the
problem or if customers are Open Receivable and Post To GL
providing incorrect information. check boxes cleared.
Delete incomplete transactions

Delete transactions that are from the Transactions Summary
incorrectly entered. window if the Allow Invoice
Deletion check box in the System
Options window is selected.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
If there is no activity against a transaction, and if it has not been posted to the General Ledger
(GL), you can void the transaction.
a n
Updating Transaction Type:
a l
Changing Complete Status by clearing the Complete check box of the transaction.
r n
• Set up a transaction type with the Open Receivables and Post to GL check boxes cleared.
t e
• Assign this transaction type to the transaction that you want to void and complete the
In
transaction.
Deleting Incomplete Transactions
l e
• If the system option Allow Invoice Deletion check box is selected, you can delete
c
incomplete transactions from Oracle Receivables.
r a
• Select Delete Record from the Edit menu or Delete Record icon form the toolbar to delete
O invoices from the Transactions Summary window. Save the record once you have deleted
the transaction.
Process Invoices
Agenda
Agenda

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Reports
Reports
• Incomplete Invoices Report: A list of incomplete

invoices.
• Invoice Exception Report: Review transactions
where the Open Receivables check box is cleared
and the customer balanced have not be updated.
n l y
e O
U s
Reports
A I
d O
(N) > Reports > Listing > (B) Single Request > (B) OK for the Incomplete Invoice Report.
(N) > Reports > Accounting > (B) Single Request > (B) OK for the Invoice Exception Report.
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Printing Transactions
You can print the following documents to send to

customers:
• Invoices
• Credit memos
• Debit memos
• Deposits
• Guarantees
• Chargebacks
• Adjustments
• Bills Receivable
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Print Documents > Invoices > Single Request > (B) OK
d O
• Transaction documents, such as invoices and credit memos must be printed for
distribution to customers.
a n
a l
• Depending on a specific statement schedule, statements and consolidated billing invoices
are generated for distribution to customers.
n
• Transactions can be printed in batches or a specific range.
r
t e
• Print the details of each tax line by setting a tax printing option, Itemize By Line, on the
customer’s profile class.
In
• Optionally, you can elect not to print transactions.
e
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Process for Printing Transactions
Then Print
Preview First
Transaction Type
Single Invoice
n l y
Invoice Batch
e O
U s
Preview First
A I
d O
• Submit the Invoice Print Preview Report to see a list of transactions that will be printed.
• Select a list of transactions by specifying values for the report parameters.
Then Print
a n
• Print transactions by batch.
a l
• Print transactions that have not been printed.
r n
• Specify a range of transactions to print.
t e
• Specify other parameters, such as Transaction type, class, or customer.
In
Note: Oracle Receivables automatically prints the tax registration number defined in the
system options on customer invoices. Oracle Receivables uses the tax printing option specified
e
c l
for the customer’s profile class, if entered. Otherwise, Oracle Receivables uses the option
specified for the Invoice Printing System Option.
r a
O
Process Invoices
Guided Demonstration - Print Transactions
(N) > Print Documents > Invoices > Single Request (B) OK
1. Select Name: Invoice Print New Invoices.
2. Accept the default Parameters.
3. (B) OK > (B) Submit
4. (M) View > Requests > (B) Find > (B) View Output
The output shows the invoices that are printed.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Practice - Print Transactions
Overview
In this practic you will print the invoice from the first practice.
• Print invoices.
• View printed invoices.
Assumptions

responsibility.
Tasks
n l y
1. Print the invoice from the first practice.
e O
2. View the printed invoice.
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Solution - Print Transactions
Print the Invoice
1. Navigation to the Print Invoices window.
• (N) > Print Documents > Invoices > Single Request > (B) OK
2. Enter Name: Select- Invoice Print, Selected Invoices.
3. Enter Parameters: Transaction number from first practice.
4. (B) OK > (B) Submit > (B) No
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
View Printed Invoice
t e
5.
In
Navigate to the Requests window.
e
•
c l
(N) > (M) View > Requests > (B) Find > (B) View Output
6.
r aView invoice.
O
Process Invoices
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
How Oracle Receivables Uses Statements
How Oracle Receivables

Uses Statements
Payments
Adjustments
Based on Aging Credit Memos

Buckets
Invoices
PAST DUE!!!
PAY NOW!!!
Custom Messages n l y
e O
U s
How Oracle Receivables Uses Statements
A I
(N) > Print Documents > Statements
d O
Statements communicate activity to your customers about invoices, credit memos, debit
n
memos, payments, on-account credits, chargebacks, deposits, and adjustments.
a
a l
• Oracle Receivables also prints your customer’s past due balances based on aging buckets.
• You can enhance your statements by printing your own custom messages.
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Using Consolidated Billing
Site C
Site A
Site B
n l y
Consolidated Billing Invoice
e O
U s
A I
d O
(N) > Print Documents > Consolidated Billing Invoices > Single Request > (B) OK
Use the Consolidated Billing Invoice program to print a single monthly invoice that includes
n
all of your customer’s transactions for that period.
a
profile class.
a l
• Customers are flagged to receive consolidated billing invoices through their customer
n
• The invoice format can be detail or summary. Both the detail and summary format
r
t e
presents invoice totals. The detail format lists all line items.
Note: If Sales Orders with different payment terms are imported through the AutoInvoice
e
Billing Statement. In
Interface from Order Management, the invoice that are created still appear on the Consolidated
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Guided Demonstration - Run Consolidated Billing
(N) > Setup > Transactions > Payment Terms
1. Enter the Name: Last Day Month.
2. Enter Description: Due on Last Day of the Month.
3. Select the Last Day of the Month check box.
4. Enter Terms: 100 percent due in 30 days
5. (I) Save.
6. (N) > Customers > Standard
7. Query Customer: American Telegraph and Telephone
8. Select Bill-to site: 32 Ave of the Americas
9. (B) Open (T) Details.
10. Enter payment terms: Last Day Month payment term.

n l y
11. (N) > Print Documents > Consolidated Billing Invoices > Single Request > (B) OK
e O
12. Select Print New Consolidated Billing Invoices
U s
13. Enter parameters:
− Cutoff Date: 01-FEB-2001. A I
d
program would not have included the January 31st invoices.
O
Prints all the invoices for the customers for January. Do not use 31-Jan-2001 because the
− Last Day of Month?: Yes.

a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Practice - Print Consolidated Billing
Overview
In this practice, you will create and use a payment term using the last day of the month option for
consolidated billing invoices.
• Create a payment term with last day of the month option.
• Assign your payment term to a customer.
Assumptions

responsibility.
Tasks
n l y
1. Create a payment term with last day of the month option.
e O
2. Assign your payment term to your customer
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Solution - Print Consolidated Billing
Create a payment term
1. Navigate to the Payment Terms window:
• (N) Setup > Transactions > Payment Terms
2. Enter the Name and Description of <XX> Last Day.
3. Select the Last Day of the Month check box.
4. Enter First Installment: Includes Tax and Freight
5. Enter the terms 100 percent due to 30 days.
6. (I) Save.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e
Assign Payment Term In
7. c l
Navigate to the Customers window.
r a•
O
8.
(N) Customers > Standard
Find your customer by entering the name in the name field and (B) Find.
Process Invoices
9. Select the Bill To site.
10. Select the Business Purpose tab and (B) Open.
11. Select your payment term <XX> Last Day for the list of values in the Payment Terms field.
12. (I) Save.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Summary
Summary

• Describe the way processing invoices fits into the
Receivables process
• Enter and complete invoices
• Perform other invoice actions
• Correct invoices
• Print transactions and statements
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices
Process Invoices Using
AutoInvoice
Chapter 14
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Process Invoices Using AutoInvoice

Chapter 14 - Page 1
Process Invoices Using

AutoInvoice
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 14 - Page 2
Objectives
Objectives
After this module, you should be able to do the

following:
• Describe the AutoInvoice process
• Define AutoInvoice
• Correct errors by using AutoInvoice Exception
Handling
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 14 - Page 3
Agenda
Agenda
• Overview of the AutoInvoice process

• Defining AutoInvoice process
• Correcting errors during import
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 14 - Page 4
AutoInvoice Process
AutoInvoice Process
SQL Valid Oracle

loader AutoInvoice
Third party lines Receivables
interface
data tables transaction
tables
Interface Error lines

Oracle Program
data
View and correct

n l y
invalid records
e O
U s
AutoInvoice Process
A I
• The AutoInvoice process imports large numbers of transactions for seamless integration
from Oracle or non-Oracle systems.
- Invoices
d O
- Debit memos
a n
- Credit memos
- On-account credits
a l
r n
• The AutoInvoice process also calculates taxes for the imported transactions, or passes the
e
tax through the tables where the tax is calculated.
t
In
• Errors are easily corrected online with user interfaces.
• Oracle Receivables uses grouping rules to import lines.
l e
Note: You cannot import deposits or guarantees.
c
r a
O

Chapter 14 - Page 5
AutoInvoice Integration
Receivables
Projects Non Oracle

Systems
Property Service Order

n l y
Management
e O
Management
U s
In Oracle Receivables, you can create invoices from the following Oracle applications:
A I
• Order Management
• Projects
d O
• Service
a n
• Property Manager
a l
Oracle Receivables can create invoices from the following non-Oracle applications:
r n
• Legacy system (for transaction history)
t e
• Non-Oracle billing applications
In
• Non-Oracle order entry applications
e
c l
r a
O

Chapter 14 - Page 6
What Occurs During AutoInvoice
AutoInvoicing
• Line, accounting, and sales credit
information populates 3 interface
tables
• Lines are ordered and grouped
• Tax is calculated
Imported • GL date is determined Invoices
Transactions • GL accounts are assigned using Created
AutoAccounting
• Tax, freight, commitments, and
credit memos are linked to
transaction lines
•
•
All transactions are batched
Validated lines are used to create n l y
the transaction
e O
U s
A
When imported transactions are processed through the AutoInvoice program, the following I
events happen:
d O
• Line, accounting, and sales credit information populates three Receivables interface
tables.
• Lines are ordered and grouped by the rules defined.
a n
a
• Tax is calculated by the Sales Tax Engine. l
n
• GL (General Ledger) date is determined by the rules or, if rules are not used, from the
r
t e
ship or sales order date.
• GL accounts are assigned using AutoAccounting.
In
• Tax, freight, commitments, and credit memos are linked to transaction lines based on the
e
c l
Reference ID or Reference flexfield.
• All transactions are batched by batch source name and request ID.
r a
• Validated lines are used to create the transactions.
O • Error lines remain in the Interface Table for correction.

Chapter 14 - Page 7
AutoInvoice Interface Tables
RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL
RA_INTERFACE_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL
RA_INTERFACE_SALESCREDITS_ALL
n l y
e O
U s
Every line must use the RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL table. The other two tables are
A I
optional.
RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL Table
d O
a n
This table contains information related to all transactions to be processed by AutoInvoice.
Transactions include invoices, debit memos, credit memos, and on-account credits. This table
l
holds the key data such as bill-to customer, ship-to customer, and transaction date.
a
n
• Each record contains line, tax, freight, or finance charges information.
r
t e
• The Line_Type field identifies the type of information contained in the record.
• A record can be a parent record: Line, Header Freight, or Charges; or a child record: Tax
In
or line-level Freight.
e
l
• A child record is linked to the parent record using the Link-To Transaction flexfield.
c
r a
O

Chapter 14 - Page 8
RA_INTERFACE_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL Table
Oracle Order Management does not use this table because AutoAccounting creates the
distributions in Oracle Receivables.
• This table contains accounting distributions to be used by the transactions defined in
RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL.
• Accounts defined in this table override any accounts created using AutoAccounting.
• You can choose to pass some or all account information to AutoInvoice. Any accounts
that are not passed will be derived using AutoAccounting.
• Records in this table are linked to records in the RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL table
using the Transaction flexfield.
RA_INTERFACE_SALESCREDITS_ALL Table
This table contains all sales credit information for the transactions in the
RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL table.
• The two tables are linked using the Transaction flexfield.
• This table is required to track sales credits.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 14 - Page 9
Agenda
Agenda

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Transaction Batch Sources
Batch Source “IMPORTED”
The batch source allows you to:

• Reject or automatically correct the tax code
• Reject transactions with invalid lines, or create
transactions excluding the invalid lines
• Reject or automatically adjust the GL date if the
transaction date falls in a closed period n l y
e O
U s
Assign a batch source type of “Imported” to invoices created by AutoInvoice.
A I
The batch source allows you to:
• Reject or automatically correct the tax code.
d O
n
• Reject transactions with invalid lines, or create transactions excluding the invalid lines.
a
a l
• Reject or automatically adjust the GL date if the transaction date falls in a closed period.
If the transaction date is in a closed period, you can adjust the date to the first GL date of the
r n
next open or future period, or you can reject the transaction.
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Defining Transaction Batch Sources
Unit Price
Quantity Revenue
Amount
Passed = Calculated Revenue Amount
AutoInvoice
Clearing
n l y
Difference Account
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Setup > Transactions > Sources
d O
AutoInvoice calculates the revenue amount by multiplying the quantity and unit selling price.
n
Use the AutoInvoice Clearing account to post the difference between the passed and calculated
a
revenue amount.
a l
If you do not want to use the AutoInvoice Clearing account, the passed and calculated revenue
amount must be the same.
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Guided Demonstration - Define Batch Source
(N) >Setup > Transactions > Sources
1. Enter Name and Description: Demo Source.
2. Enter Type: Imported.

− Use imported batch sources to import transactions into Receivables using
AutoInvoice.
3. Enter the range of Effective Dates: Start date is the current date and do not enter an end date.
4. Check the Automatic Batch Numbering box.
5. Enter Last Number: 999.

− Receivables automatically updates the Last Number fields, so you can review this
batch source later and see the last transaction number that was generated.
6. Select the Copy Document Number to Transaction Number box.

− Check this to use the same value for both the document number and the transaction
number for transactions assigned to this source (Optional).
− If your application uses Gapless document sequences, check this box if you require
n l y
gapless transaction numbers. Checking this box ensures that transaction numbers are
generated sequentially and there are no "missing" numbers.
e O
7. Enter Transaction Type: Invoice.
U s
8. (T) AutoInvoice Processing Options.
A I
9. Enter Invalid Tax Rate: Correct.
d O
− Specify how you want AutoInvoice to handle imported transactions that have
Invalid Tax Rates.
a n
− An invalid tax rate is one in which the imported transaction's tax rate does not match
its tax code.
a l
− Enter 'Correct' if you want AutoInvoice to automatically update the tax rate that you
r n
supplied to the one that you defined previously for the tax code.
t e
− Enter 'Reject' if you want AutoInvoice to reject the transaction.
In
10. Enter Invalid Lines; Create Invoice.
e
c l
− Specify how you want AutoInvoice to handle imported transactions with Invalid
Lines by entering either 'Reject Invoice' or 'Create Invoice.'
r a
11. Enter GL Date in Closed Period: Adjust.
O − Specify how you want AutoInvoice to handle imported transactions that have lines
in the Interface Lines table that are in a closed period.

− To have AutoInvoice automatically adjust the GL dates to the first GL date of the
next open or future enterable period, enter 'Adjust' in the GL Date in a Closed
Period field.
− Enter 'Reject' to reject these transactions.
12. Enter Grouping Rule: Default.
13. Do not select the Create Clearing check box.

− Use this check box to require that the revenue amount for each transaction line is
equal to the selling price times the quantity specified for that line.
− Use this option to distribute revenue on a transaction in an amount that is not equal
to the transaction line amount.
− If you check this box, AutoInvoice puts any difference between the revenue amount
and the selling price times the quantity for a transaction into the AutoInvoice
Clearing account that you have defined.
− Otherwise, AutoInvoice requires that the revenue amount be equal to the selling
price times the quantity for all of the transactions it is processing.
− Define your clearing account in the Automatic Accounting window.
14. Select the Allow Sales Credit check box.
Indicate whether sales credits can be entered for transactions using this source by checking
or unchecking the Allow Sales Credit box. This option and the Require Salesreps option in
the System Options window determine whether sales credits are optional or required.
n l y
15. (T) Customer Information
e O
16. Select ID for all options.
− Indicates whether AutoInvoice validates your customer information for this batch
U s
source using a value or identifier.
− Select ‘None' for no validation.
A I
− Select ‘Value’ to import a record into AutoInvoice tables using its actual name.
− Select ‘ID’ to use its internal identifier.
d O
17. (T) Accounting Information
a n
a l
r n
− How validation occurs for Invoice and Accounting Rule data for this batch source.
− Select either 'Id' or 'Segment' to indicate whether you want AutoInvoice to validate
t e
the identifier or the flexfield segment for this batch source.
In
19. Check the Derive Date check box.
e
c l
− To derive the default rule start date and default GL date from the ship date, rule start
date, order date and the default date that is supplied when AutoInvoice is submitted.
r a − If you use Oracle Inventory and Oracle Order Management for sales order
O shipments, you should elect to derive your dates and use the shipment date for your

transaction general ledger date. In this way you can ensure that you have booked
your revenue and cost to the same accounting period.
− If you do not match revenue and cost in the same period, you violate basic GAAP
principles, and may distort your profit. In addition, you are unable to run a
meaningful Margin Analysis report. This report summarizes your revenue and cost
of goods sold transactions by item and customer order and specifies a transaction
date range. If your transactions are booked in the wrong period, this report reflects
those incorrect transactions.
20. Select Amount

− To indicate how you want AutoInvoice to validate your Revenue Account
Allocation data for this batch source.
21. (T) Other Information (Use the arrow to show more alternative regions).
23. (T) Sales Credits Data Validation.
24. Select ID for Salespersons and Sales Credit Types.
25. Select Amount for Sales Credits

− To validate Sales Credits based on either Amount or Percent.
26. (I) Save.

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Grouping Rules
Grouping Rules
AutoInvoice Records Transaction Flexfields
Currency Bill-to Item Attr (Order #) Attr2 (Order Type)
USD ACME A 5001 Domestic
USD ACME B 5002 Domestic
USD ACME C 112 No Ship
USD ACME D 501 International
USD ACME E 502 International
Grouping Rules
All mandatory rules (includes currency and bill to)
+ optional rule: Transaction Flexfield Attribute2
Invoice 1
Order #
Invoice 2 Invoice 3
Order # 501 n l y
5001 & 5002
Order # 112
& 502
e O
U s
Grouping Rules
A I
(N) > Setup > Transactions > AutoInvoice > Grouping Rules
d O
In the example shown in this slide the invoices are grouped by Currency, Bill-to and lastly,
Transaction Flexfield Attribute 2, Order Type.
a n
transactions.
a l
• Grouping rules are mandatory and determine how transaction lines are grouped into
n
• Optionally, you can use line ordering rules to determine the order in which lines are
r
t e
displayed on a transaction.
• To uniquely identify imported transactions and link the tax, freight, commitments, and
In
credit memos, define the Transaction flexfields.
e
c l
• AutoInvoice validates your data by ensuring that the columns in Receivables Interface
Tables reference the appropriate values and columns in Receivables.
r a
O

Grouping Transaction Attributes
Currency
Bill-To Address
GL Date
Salesperson
Tax Code
Sales Order n l y
Accounting Rules
e O
U s
A I
Receivables provide two different types of transaction attributes: required and optional.
ones.
d O
• You cannot add or delete required transaction attributes, but you can always add optional
transaction attributes.
a n
• A default grouping rule is provided with Receivables which groups lines using required
a l
• Optional transaction attributes are available to create custom grouping rules.
n
• Grouping and Ordering Rules must include required attributes and may include optional
r
attributes.
t e
Required attribute examples: Bill-To Address, Currency, GL (General Ledger) Date, Primary
Salesperson.
e In
l
Optional attribute examples: Accounting Rules, Sales Order, Tax Code.
c
r a
O

Grouping Rule Hierarchy
Hierarchy to determine
Assign Grouping Rules to: which Grouping Rule to
use:
• Invoice Sources
1. Invoice Source
• Customer Credit Profile
Classes 2. Customer Credit Profile
Class
• System Options
3. System Options
n l y
e O
U s
Assign Grouping Rules to Invoice Sources, Customer Credit Profile Classes, or System
A I
Options.
d O
AutoInvoice uses the following hierarchy to determine which Grouping Rule to use:
• Invoice Source
a n
• Customer Credit Profile Class
• System Options.
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Line Ordering Rules
Line Ordering Rules
Ascending
or
Descending
Sales Order
or Sales
Order Line
Ship Via
Ship Date n l y
e O
U s
Line Ordering Rules
A I
(N) > Setup > Transactions > AutoInvoice > Line Ordering Rules
d O
AutoInvoice uses Line Ordering Rules to order and number the lines grouped into transactions.
amounts are listed first.

a n
For example, you might want to use Line Ordering Rules to ensure that the highest invoice line
a l
If an Ordering rule is not defined, lines will appear on transactions in random order.
n
You can specify a Line Ordering Rule for each Grouping Rule.
r
t e
You can also assign transaction attributes to your Line Ordering Rules. You can assign a
priority to these attributes for each of your invoice Line Ordering Rules. You can also specify
e In
an ascending or descending order for each transaction attribute assigned to a rule. For example.
Create an invoice Line Ordering Rule with attribute SALES_ORDER_LINE.
c l
r a
O

Guided Demonstration - Define Line Ordering Rules
(N) > Setup > Transactions > AutoInvoice > Line Ordering Rules
1. Enter Name: Demo Ordering Rule.
2. Enter Description: Demo Ordering Rule (optional).
3. Accept the default start date in the Effective Dates.
4. Enter Order By Sequence: 1

− Enter a higher number to specify a lower priority transaction attribute for this
invoice line ordering rule.
5. Enter Transaction Attribute: Ship Via

− Receivables uses the transaction attributes to determine how AutoInvoice orders
invoice lines when it groups the transactions.
6. Enter Type: Ascending.

− To specify whether you want this transaction attribute to be ordered from least to
greatest (Ascending), or greatest to least (Descending).
n l y
7. (I) Save.
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Guided Demonstration - Define Grouping Rules
(N) > Setup > Transactions > AutoInvoice > Grouping Rules
1. Enter Name: Demo Grouping Rule.
2. Enter Description: Demo Grouping Rule (optional).
3. Enter Line Ordering Rule: Demo Ordering Rule (optional).

− The invoice line ordering rule tells AutoInvoice how to order transaction lines
within this grouping rule.
4. Accept the default start date in the Effective Dates.
5. Enter Transaction Class: Invoice.

− If AutoInvoice uses grouping rules and is processing a transaction class that is not
defined for this grouping rule, AutoInvoice will only use the mandatory grouping
transaction attributes.
6. Enter Optional Grouping Characteristics: Sales Order.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Transaction Flexfields
• Invoice Header (optional): Specifies invoice

header information.
• Line (required): Uniquely identifies invoice lines.
• Link-To (optional): Links tax and freight to invoice
lines.
• Reference (optional): Links credit memos to
transactions.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
Transaction flexfields are descriptive flexfields that AutoInvoice uses to uniquely identify
transaction lines.
d O
Because they are unique for each transaction line, they can also be used to reference and link to
other lines.
a n
Receivables lets you determine how you want to build your transaction flexfield structure and
what information you want to capture.
a l
n
Define a flexfield for each import source. Specify which one to use during import.
r
t e
Use the Reference Flexfield to link a credit memo line to a transaction. This passes
information like order number, project number, and shipping information.
e In
c l
r a
O

Defining Transaction Flexfields
Line
Link-To
Reference Descriptive Flexfields
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Descriptive > Segments
O
Transactions Flexfields are descriptive flexfields that AutoInvoice uses to uniquely identify
transaction lines.
d
a n
• Define Transaction Flexfields in the Descriptive Key Segments window.
a l
• The Line, Link-To, and Reference structures must be identical.
Note: AutoInvoice always uses the Line Transaction Flexfield structure for both the Link-to
r n
and Reference information when importing transactions. Define the Link-to, Reference,
custom windows. t e
and Invoice Transaction flexfield structures only if this information is to be displayed on
e In
• (Optionally), use transaction flexfield information for imported invoices in lists of values
throughout the product. Use the profile option AR: Transaction Flexfield QuickPick to
c l
select the Transaction Flexfield Segment want to display. For example, if you want to be
r a able to reference the order, you need to assign the transaction flexfield segment that holds
the order number to the AR: Transaction Flexfield QuickPick profile option. The order
O number will then display in the reference column of all invoice lists for imported
invoices.

Determining Tax Liability
VAT TAX SALES TAX
Ship-To Address
Sales Tax Engine n l y

e O
U s
A I
AutoInvoice gives you the flexibility to handle all your taxing needs for the following tax
methods:
• VAT (Value Added Tax)
d O
• Sales Tax
a n
address.
a l
Sales tax is calculated by AutoInvoice using the tax rates associated with your shipping
n
AutoInvoice automatically uses the Sales Tax Engine to calculate tax for the invoice lines.
r
e
You can import additional manual tax lines through the interface table.
t
e In
c l
r a
O

AutoInvoice Validation
Checks Lines for: Accounting Rules &
Accounting Periods
Checks Interface Tables with those in

Receivables for:
– Existence
– Batch Sources
– Uniqueness
– Precision
– Cross Validation
n l y
e O
U s
Validates lines for:
A I
• Accounting rules
• Accounting periods
d O
n
AutoInvoice validates your data for compatibility with Receivables. It ensures that the columns
a
checks for:
a l
in Receivables’ interface tables reference the appropriate values and columns in Recievables. It
n
• Existence: Ensures that the values for some columns are already defined.
r
e
• Batch Sources: Ensures consistent values for fields in the Transaction Sources window.
t
In
• Uniqueness: Ensures that the invoice number you supply is unique within a given batch
source.
l e
• Precision: Ensures that the amount and accounted amount have the correct precision.
c
• Cross Validation: Ensures that column values agree with each other.
r a
O

Submitting AutoInvoice
AutoInvoice Master Program

Parameters:
• Source
• Default Date
• Transaction Type
• Bill-To Customer Number/Name Range
• GL Date Range
• Ship Date Range
• Transaction or Sales Number Range
•
•
Invoice Date Range
Ship-To Customer Number/Name Range
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Interfaces > AutoInvoice > (B) Single Request > (B) OK
d O
The AutoInvoice Master Program can be submitted from the Standard Report Submission
scheduling features.
a n
(SRS) window. This process can be schedule to run on specific intervals using the SRS
a l
• Process specific transactions or a range of transactions by entering report parameters as
listed on the slide above.
r n
t e
• Use different selection criteria to submit individual transactions or groups of transactions.
• Submit a maximum of fifteen instances.
In
Note: An instance refers to how AutoInvoice groups and processes your transactions.
e
quickly.
c l
Submitting a greater number of instances lets you import transactions into Receivables more
r a
Instructor Note: If you are using ADS, it kicks off AutoInvoice automatically because the
workflow contains a database trigger to run AutoInvoice automatically.
O

Guided Demonstration - Submit AutoInvoice
(N) > Interfaces > AutoInvoice > Single Request > (B) OK
1. Select: AutoInvoice Master Program.
− Invoice Source: Order Entry
− Default Date: 31-Dec-2001

− The other option would be to schedule this process to run on a regular basis.
4. (M) View > Requests > (B) Find > (B) View Output
The top portion of the AutoInvoice Validation Report is a summary of the AutoInvoice
Exception Errors for quick reference. This report helps determine what errors need to be
corrected and can be used a tool to research the errors before entering the Interface
Exception window.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Managing AutoInvoice System Options
• Specify the indices for the GL_CODE

COMBINATIONS, MTL_SYSTEM_ ITEMS, and
RA_TERRITORIES tables
• Use SQL*Trace to tune AutoInvoice
• Select to manually or automatically purge
successfully transferred records
• Adjust the amount of memory allocated to
AutoInvoice for validation
• Specify the level of detail required in the
AutoInvoice log file
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
AutoInvoice System Options are set in the AutoInvoice region of the Trans and Customers tab
of the System Options window.
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Implementation Considerations
• What type of transactions or lines will be

imported?
• Will you need to modify the Transaction
flexfield?
• How and when will errors be identified?
• Who is responsible for correcting the errors?
• Will you need to create Grouping Rules with
optional attributes?
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Agenda
Agenda

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Correct Errors Overview
SQL Valid
AutoInvoice Oracle
Third party loader lines Receivables
interface
data tables transaction
tables
Interface Error lines

Oracle Program
data
View and correct

invalid records
AutoInvoice Exception n l y
Handling Window
e O
U s
A
The AutoInvoice Exception Handling Windows can be used to correct errors that are in theI
AutoInvoice Interface Table.
d O
• Records that pass validation are transferred into Receivables transaction tables.
AutoInvoice interface tables.

a n
• Records that fail validation are called exceptions; these records remain in the
a l
• Once you have corrected the errors, you must resubmit AutoInvoice.
n
• Valid lines cannot be changed in the AutoInvoice Exception Handling windows. Only
r
e
those lines with errors can be changed.
t
e In
c l
r a
O

AutoInvoice Exception Handling Windows
Interface Exceptions Window
Interface Lines Window
Line Errors Window

n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Control > AutoInvoice > Interface Lines
(N) > Control > AutoInvoice > Interface Exceptions
d O
Interface Exceptions Window
a n
with each error.
a l
• Displays the interface ID, exception type, error message, and the invalid value associated
r n
• Cannot edit data in this window, but you can view the error message and easily correct
e
the error by clicking the Details button.
t
In
Note: The error message and column name with erroneous data is displayed in the Message
column, and the value that needs to be corrected is displayed in the Invalid Value column.
c l e
r a
O

Interface Lines Window
• Displays all records in the interface tables that failed validation, provides an error
message, and can be used to correct invalid records.
• Click the Details button, the window opens where the errors can be corrected. Buttons are
provided to correct specific types of errors.
• Correct errors in these windows.
Line Errors Window
• Displays all errors associated with a specific line and can only be opened from the
Interface Lines window.
• View all errors associated with a single line by clicking the Errors button in the Interface
Lines window.
• Displays the interface ID, the error type, error message, and the invalid value.
Note: You might use this window when you access the Interface Lines window directly, which
does not display the error messages.The type indicates which button to click in the Interface
Lines window.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Guided Demonstration - Correct Errors
(N) > Control > AutoInvoice > Interface Exceptions
1. Query using Control F11 to see all the invalid records.
2. Select the third error on this window (or other error to correct).
− Note the error message about Invalid Transaction Type and column reference
(CUST_TRX_TYPE_ID).
3. (B) Details.
In the Interface Lines window, are several buttons, Accounting, Sales Credit, Freight, and
Tax. By selecting these buttons, the related fields where corrections can be made, are
displayed or add the error field to the Interface Lines window.
4. Place your cursor in any fields to the right of the Interface Line Id.
− The Interface Line Id is not part of the folder.
5. (M) Folder > Show Field
6. Add the (CUST_TRX_TYPE_ID) column to correct the seeded line (or proper column for
n l y
7.
other errors.)
Select 1361 WF Invoice from the list of values (or proper items if correcting other errors.)
e O
8. (I) Save.
U s
9. (B) Errors
A I
− To check for other errors for this particular record.
− All errors for each record must be corrected.
d O
n
− Rerun AutoInvoice Program to imported correct lines.
a
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Practice - Correct Errors
Overview
In this practice, you will query and correct AutoInvoice errors using the new AutoInvoice
Exception Handling feature.
• Query records in the Interface Exceptions window.
• Correct the error in the Interface Lines window.
• Run AutoInvoice.
• View AutoInvoice Report.
Assumptions

n l y
responsibility.
e O
Tasks
U s
1. Query records in the Interface Exceptions window.
A I
2. Correct the error in the Interface Lines window.
d O
3. Run AutoInvoice.
a n
4. View AutoInvoice Report.
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Solution - Correct Errors
Query Records in the Interface Exceptions
1. Navigate to the Interface Exceptions window:
• (N) Control > AutoInvoice > Interface Exceptions
2. Run the query: (K) Ctrl + F11.
3. View the various errors.
4. Select a record and view the error message in the Message field.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
Correct the Error
r n
5.
t e
Navigate to the Interface Lines window.
6. (B) Details.
e In
7.
c l
Place cursor into the LINE_TYPE field and select Show Field from the Folder menu to
r aselect a corresponding field name. If for example, you are correcting the payment terms; you
would select TERM_NAME from the list.
O
8. Select a valid value from the list of values.

9. (B) Error.
Verify that the line has not more errors. If it does, correct those errors also.
Write down the Sale Order Number: __________________________
10. Save your work.
n l y
e O
U s
Run AutoInvoice
A I
11. Navigate to the Run AutoInvoice window.
d O
•
a n
(N) Interfaces > AutoInvoice > Single Request > (B) OK
12. Select: AutoInvoice Master Program.

a l
r n
t e
− Invoice Source: Order Entry
In
− Default Date: Today’s Date
e
l
14. Your Sales Order Number (so each person gets a chance to see results.)
c
r a
− The other option would be to schedule this process to run on a regular basis.
O

n l y
View AutoInvoice Report e O
Navigate to the Requests window.
U s
• (M) View > Requests > (B) Find > (B) View Output
A I
d O
The top portion of the AutoInvoice Validation Report is a summary of the AutoInvoice
a n
Exception Errors for quick reference. This report helps determine what errors need to be
corrected and can be used a tool to research the errors before entering the Interface
Exception window.
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Summary
Summary

• Describe the AutoInvoice process
• Define AutoInvoice
• Correct errors by using AutoInvoice Exception
Handling
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Implement Customer
Invoicing
Chapter 15
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Implement Customer Invoicing

Chapter 15 - Page 1
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 15 - Page 2
Objectives
Objectives
After completing this module, you should be able to:

• Enter set up information relating to invoicing
• Discuss the major implementation considerations
in customer invoicing
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 15 - Page 3
Agenda
Agenda
• Entering invoice setup information

• Discussing major implementation considerations
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 15 - Page 4
Required Setup Steps for Transactions
Before you can use customer invoices, the following

must be set up:
• Customers
• Receivables Transaction Types
• AutoAccounting
• Payment Terms
• Transaction Sources
• Remit-To Addresses
• System and Profile Options
n l y
e O
U s
Before you can use customer invoices, the following must be set up:
A I
processing.
d O
• Customers: Define Customers including Bill To and Ship To address for transaction
information to the transactions.

a n
• Receivables Transaction Types: Assign to transactions. Transaction types add default
a l
• AutoAccounting: Specifies the General Ledger accounts of transactions that you enter
n
manually or import using AutoInvoice.
r
t e
• Payment Terms: Determine the payment schedule and cash discount information for
customer invoices, debit memos, and commitments.
e In
• Transaction Sources: Assign to transactions to control transaction and batch numbering
and provide default information.
c l
• Remit-to addresses: Informs customers where to send payments.
r a
• System and Profile Options: Provides default values for some Receivables operations,
such as how Receivables processes data and controls the actions users can perform.
O

Chapter 15 - Page 5
Receivables Transaction Types
Set Defaults for: Select only one Class:

• Payment Terms • Invoice
• Account Numbers • Debit Memo
• Creation Sign • Credit Memo
• Application • Deposit
• Printing • Guarantee
• Post to General Ledger • Chargeback
• Allow Freight • Bills Receivable
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Setup > Transactions > Transaction Types
You must set up transaction types before you can enter invoices.
d O
• Transaction types can be used to set defaults and control activities on a transaction.
a n
• For each transaction type, you can select only one of seven transaction classes.
Transaction types determine:
a l
• Transaction Class. The Transaction Class determines:
r n
- If the transaction can be posted to the General Ledger (GL).
t e
- If the transaction is an open receivable.
In
- If tax must be calculated, or freight can be entered.
- The default credit memo type for an invoice.
l e
- The default invoice type for a commitment.
c
• Creation Sign: For the creation sign enter Positive, Negative, or Any Sign for the initial
r a sign of the transaction.
O Note: For guarantees and deposits, the creation sign must be Positive.

Chapter 15 - Page 6
Guided Demonstration - Setup Transaction Types
(N) > Setup > Transactions > Transaction Types
1. Enter Name and Description: Demo.
2. Enter Class: Invoice.

− If Deposit or Guarantee are selected, Receivables sets Open Receivable and Post to
GL to Yes, Allow Freight, Tax Calculation, and Allow Overapplication to No,
Creation Sign to 'Positive Sign,' and Natural Application Only to Yes.
3. Select Open Receivable check box.

− If Open Receivable is selected, Receivables updates the customer balances each
time a transaction is completed
− If defining a 'void' transaction type, set Open Receivable to No.
4. Select Post To GL check box.

− This box must be checked if the class is Deposit or Guarantee.
− If defining a 'void' transaction type, do not check this box.
5. Enter Terms: Net 60.

n l y
6. Select Printing Option: Print.
− Can be overridden when entering transactions.
e O
7. Select Transaction Status: Open
U s
assign this transaction type.
A I
− Enter 'Void' to void debit memos, on-account credits or invoices to which you
8. Check the Allow Freight box.
d O
9. Check the Tax Calculation box.
a n
− Check this box to require the Tax Code field in the Lines window.
a
10. Select Creation Sign: Positive Sign.
l
r n
− Cannot be updated after transactions have been entered with this type.
t e
In
11. Do not select the Natural Application Only or Allow Overapplication check boxes.
− If Natural Application Only is checked, Receivables sets Allow Overapplication to
l
No.
c e
− Cannot be updated after the transaction type is saved.
r a
12. Enter Application Rule Set: Prorate All from the list of values (optional).
O − An Application Rule Set determines the default payment steps with the Applications
window or AutoLockbox to apply receipts to transactions.

Chapter 15 - Page 7
− If you do not enter a rule set, Receivables uses the rule set in the System Options
window as the default.
13. Enter the Credit Memo Type: Credit Memo.

− To use when crediting items with this transaction type (optional).
14. Accept the default date for the Start Date.
15. Enter the following accounts.

− Receivable Account: 01-000-1210-0000-000.
− Freight Account: 01-110-7220-0000-000.
− Revenue Account: 01-110-4150-0000-000
− Clearing Account: 01-000-1222-0000-000
− For difference between the revenue amount specified for the Revenue account
and the selling price times the quantity for imported invoice lines.
− Unbilled Receivable Account: 01-000-1232-0000-000
− For Bill In Arrears invoicing rules.
− Unearned Revenue Account: 01-000-2550-0000-000
− For Bill In Advance invoicing rules.
− Tax Account: 01-110-7710-0000-000
− Receivables uses these accounts, along with your AutoAccounting definition, to
determine the accounting for transactions.
16. (I) Save.

− Enter a transaction class of Bills Receivable to enable the Bills Receivable tabbed n l y
region for entering bills receivable information.
− Bills receivable transaction types indicate the type of bill receivable, such as
e O
accepted bill, promissory note, or unsigned bill, and define accounting and other
attributes for bills receivable.
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Chapter 15 - Page 8
Using Natural Application
Only Natural Application Selected
0 +500
Application
Natural Application Not Selected
-500 0 +500
n l y
Application
e O
U s
A I
Applications are applied differently depending on the values selected for the transaction type
options Natural Application Only and Allow Overapplication.
• Natural Application Only Selected, Allow Overapplication Clear.
d O
a n
- Oracle Receivables allows any application that reduces the transaction amount
toward or to zero without changing the sign of the transaction.
a l
- For example, if the transaction amount is +$500, Oracle Receivables allows the
n
applications as shown in the top section of the diagram.
r
t e
• Natural Application Only Clear, Allow Overapplication Selected or Clear.
- Oracle Receivables allows any application that reduces or increases the transaction,
e In
even if the application changes the sign of the transaction as shown in the bottom
section of the diagram.
c l
r a
O

Chapter 15 - Page 9
AutoAccounting
AutoAccounting
Invoice
Salesperson = Joe Adams

Transaction Type = Invoice
1. Wrist Pad 2 @ 1,000
Revenue Account = 01-100-4505-201

Salesperson = Joe Adams
Revenue Account = 02-
02-100-
100-4000-
4000-000
Account Type = Revenue
Segment Constant Value Table Name
CO 01
CC Salesreps
Account Trans. Types
Product Standard Line
Transaction Type = Invoice
Revenue Account = 02-
02-000-
000-4505-
4505-100
n l y
Standard Line = Wrist Pad
Revenue Account = 02-02-000-
000-4101-
4101-201
e O
U s
AutoAccounting
A I
(N) > Setup > Transactions > AutoAccounting
d O
Oracle Receivables provides flexible setup for transaction accounting by using
a n
AutoAccounting and determines the General Ledger (GL) accounts for invoices by
determining a value for each segment of the accounting flexfield.
a l
• When setting up AutoAccounting, rules are define for how Oracle Receivables should
n
derive the value for each segment. This can either be a constant value or a table.
r
t e
• For each account type, define the flexfield segments by selecting a table name or entering
a constant value. The tables that can be used for segment values are Transaction Types,
Tax Code.
e In
Salesperson, Customer - Bill To, Standard Line, Freight (for Freight Account only), and
c l
r a
O

Payment Terms
Payment Terms
% of
Discount
Payment Allowed
Schedule
Last Day of
the Month
option
Credit Check
Check box n l y
e O
U s
Payment Terms
A I
O
Define standard payment terms to determine payment schedules and percentages of discounts
allowed.
d
a
• The formula used to determine the amount due is: n
a l
- Amount Due = Relative Amount/Base Amount x Invoice Amount.
- For example: Relative Amount = 60%/Base Amount = 100% would be 60% of
Invoice amount.
r n
e
• Select the Credit Check check box to trigger Order Management credit check.
t
In
• Enter the number of days before the due date that the invoice should be printed.
• Allow discounts on partial payments by selecting the Allow Discount on Partial
l e
Payments checkbox.
c
• Specify how to allocate tax and freight on invoices with split terms: in the first
r a installment, or prorated across all installments.

• Select the Last Day of Month check box or a specific day to send consolidated invoices.
O

Guided Demonstration - Create Payment Terms
1. Enter the Name and Description: Demo Payment Term
2. Select First Installment: Include tax and freight
3. Enter the terms 100 percent due in 30 days.
4. Enter the following two discounts:

− First Discount: 20%, 10 days.
− Second Discount: 10%, 20 days.
5. (N) > Customers > Standard
6. Find Customer: American Telephone and Telegraph
7. Select Bill-to Site: 32 Ave of the Americas.
8.
9.
(B) Open > (T) Details
Enter payment terms: Demo Payment Term. n l y

10. (I) Save.
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Transaction Sources
Transaction Sources
Control
10001
10002
10003
Invoice Batch Defaults Numbering

n l y
e O
U s
Transaction Sources
A I
(N) > Setup > Transactions > Sources
O
Transaction sources are used to control transaction batching, numbering, and specify default
transaction types.
d
a n
• Select validation options for imported transactions.
account credits.
a l
• Assign batch sources to invoices, debit memos, commitments, credit memos, and on-
r n
• When setting up the Credit Memo Workflow, assign a Manual source.
e
• Select the Copy Document Number to Transaction Number check box to use the same
t
In
value for both the document number and the transaction number for transactions assigned
to this source. You must check the box if using Gapless document sequences.
c l e
Note: For AutoInvoice feeds from the Service Contracts module, you must use the seeded
Transaction Source of OKS_CONTRACTS. For more information on Transaction Sources and
r a
Autoinvoicing, refer to the Oracle Receivables User Guide or 11i Order to Cash: Process
Invoices Using AutoInvoice.
O

Guided Demonstration - Define Transaction Source
(N) >Setup > Transactions > Sources
1. Enter Name and Description: Demo Transaction Source.
2. Enter Type: Manual
3. Enter the range of Effective Dates: Start date is the current date and do not enter an end date.
4. Check the Automatic Batch Numbering box.
5. Enter Last Number: 999.

− Receivables automatically updates the Last Number fields, so you can review this
batch source later and see the last transaction number that was generated.
6. Select the Copy Document Number to Transaction Number box.

− Check this to use the same value for both the document number and the transaction
number for transactions assigned to this source (Optional).
− If your application uses Gapless document sequences, check this box if you require
gapless transaction numbers. Checking this box ensures that transaction numbers are
generated sequentially and there are no "missing" numbers.
n l y
7. Enter Transaction Type: Invoice.
e O
8. (I) Save.
U s
Oracle Receivables User Guide Release 11i.
A I
For Imported Transaction Types, see the Process Invoices using AutoInvoice Chapter or the
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Remit-to Addresses
Remit-to Addresses
Remit to Address:
George’s Tool Shop
234 Fixit Street
Dimebox, Texas 77309
USA
Country State Postal Code
n l y
Customer Bill-To Address Determines Remit-To
e O
U s
Remit-to Addresses
A I
(N > Setup > Print > Remit-to Address
d O
Oracle Receivables automatically assigns all customers with bill-to addresses in the states and
n
countries defined in the Remit-To Addresses window to corresponding remit-to addresses.
a
a l
• Defined remit-to addresses to let customers know where to send payment.
• Assign each remit-to address to one or more state, country, and postal code combination.
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Guided Demonstration - Define Remit-To Address
(N) > Setup > Print > Remit-To Addresses
1. Enter Country: United States.

− The default is the country entered in the System Options window.
− If flexible address formats have been implemented and the country has an address
style assigned to it, Receivables opens a window in the style most appropriate for
that country.
2. Enter Address: 100 Center Street, C/O Demo Department, San Mateo, California, 94401,
San Mateo County.
− You must enter a postal code if they are entered values for both the From Postal
Code and the To Postal Code in the System Options window.
3. Enter Country: United States, State: Texas and Range of Postal Codes: 70000 to 79999.
− Define multiple assignments for a remit-to address that has the same country, state,
or province but different postal code ranges.
4. (I) Save.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

System Options Relating to Transactions
Header Level
Rounding Automatic
Journal Import
Allow Changes to
Printed
Transactions
Allow Deletion
of Transactions n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
• Header Level Rounding: Assigning a special account for rounding differences when
a n
converting foreign currency transactions to your functional currency. The Header Level
Rounding in enabled on the Accounting tab. Caution: It cannot be disabled once the box
l
has been selected and Header Level Rounding adds an additional line to every transaction
a
regardless of the currency.
r n
• Automatic Journal Import: Automatically import the batches you transfer by checking
t e
this box on the Accounting tab. The value becomes the default value on the Run GL
In
journal Import field in the Run General Ledger Interface window.
• Allow Change to Printed Transactions: Allow updates to printed transactions by checking
e
l
this box on the Trans and Customer tab.
c
r a
• Allow Transaction Deletion: Allow transaction to be deleted from Receivable after
ethical been saved by checking this box on the Trans and Customer tab. Do not enable
O this option if using gapless numbering of transactions.

• The following System Options were migrated from Profile Options since 11i.AR.H:

- Document Number Generation Level: Determines at what point Receivables
generates a document number for your transactions.
- Show Billing Number: Prints a unique billing invoice number when printing
consolidated billing invoices.
• Note: There are system options relating to AutoInvoicing as well. For more information
on System Options relating to Autoinvoicing, refer to 11i Order to Cash: Process
Invoices Using AutoInvoice.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Miscellaneous System Options
Print Remit
To Address
Print Home
Country
Source
of
Require
Salesperson
Territory
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
On the Miscellaneous Tab in the System Options window are several parameters that affect
transactions.
a n
selecting this checkbox.
a l
• Require Salesperson: Require Salespersons to be entered when entering transactions by
n
• Print Remit to Address: Check this box to print your remit-to address on your customer’s
r
statements.
t e
• Print Home Country: Select this option to print your home country on your invoices and
In
statement that refer to addresses in that country.
e
c l
• Source of Territory: Enter the Source of Territory to default into Salespersons,
Transactions, and Customers windows. Receivables uses the value to determine the
r a default territory for invoices and commitments. Selections are: Bill-To Site, Salesrep,
Ship-To Site, and None.
O • Discount Basis: Use to calculate discounts for your invoices. The following are the
discount options:

- Invoice Amount
- Lines Only
- Lines, Freight Items and Tax
- Lines and Tax, not Freight Items and Tax
• Accrue Interest: To automatically update the open balance in the Transactions workbench
for transactions that are past due.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Guided Demonstration - Define System Options
(N) > Setup > System > System Options (T) Accounting
1. Open each tab and discuss the System Options related to Transactions.
− Header Rounding Account and Header Level Rounding check box.
− Receivables uses this account to record any rounding differences that occur
when converting foreign currency transactions to your functional currency.
Warning: After Header Level Rounding is enabled and saved; it cannot be
disable the feature.
− Revenue Transfer Clearing Account.
− Required for Revenue Accounting.
− Automatic Journal Import check box.
− Default value for the Run GL Journal Import field in the Run General Ledger
Interface window.
− Days per Posting Cycle.
− Permits posting transactions in smaller groups to ensure that there is rollback
space during posting.
2. (T) Transactions and Customers.

− Allow Change to Printed Transactions check box.
n l y
− This option also determines whether you can update a customer's address when
printed, posted, or applied transactions are assigned to that address.
e O
option is set. Examples of activity include payments, credit memos,
U s
− Cannot update a transaction if it has activity against it, regardless of how this
− Allow Transaction Deletion box.

A I
adjustments, and including the transaction on a consolidated billing invoice.
− To allow transactions to be deleted from Receivables after they have been

saved.
d O
3. (T) Miscellaneous
− Require Salesperson check box. a n
a l
− To require that salespersons be entered when entering transactions,
r n
− Print Remit to Address check box.
− To print the remit-to addresses on customers' statements.
t e
− Print Home Country check box.
e In
− To print the home country on invoices and statements that refer to addresses in
that country.
l
− Default Country.
c
r a − Receivables uses this information to specify the home country for tax
calculation, flexible bank structures, flexible address formats, and taxpayer id
O and tax registration number validation.

− It also provides a default value of the Country field when entering addresses.

− Can override this value by setting the user profile option 'Default Country.'
− Source of Territory
− Receivables uses the value entered here to determine the default territory for
invoices and commitments.
− Select from the following sources:
− Bill-To Site: Use customer's Bill-To Address as the default.
− Salesrep: Use the territory assigned to customer's primary salesperson as
the default.
− Ship-To Site: Use customer's Ship-To Address as the default.
− None: Do not enter a default territory.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Profile Options
Profile Options
• AR: Allow Update of Existing Sales Credits

• AR: Change Customer on Transaction
• AR: Default Exchange Rate Type
• AR: Override Adjustment Activity Account Option
• AR: Transaction Batch Source
• AR: Use Invoice Accounting For Credit Memos
Profile
Options n l y
O
Receivables
e
U s
Profile Options
System Administrator
A I
(N) > Profile > System
O
Profile Options control many functions in Receivables. For more detailed information, refer to
the Oracle Receivables User Guide, Appendix A.
d
a n
• AR: Allow Update of Existing Sales Credits: Determines whether a user can update
existing sales credits.
a l
• AR: Change Customer on Transaction: Determines whether you can update customer
r n
names in the Transaction windows.
t e
• AR: Default Exchange Rate Type: Determine the default exchange rate to use when
converting foreign currency transactions to your function currency.
e In
• AR: Override Adjustment Activity Account Option: Determines whether you can
override the default adjustment account when entering or updating manual adjustments
c l
and when updating automatic adjustments.
r a
• AR: Transaction Batch Source: Determines how information will be sorted when using
the value in the Customer’s Alternate Name field when running certain reports.
O • AR: Use Invoice Accounting For Credit Memos: Determines whether to assign your
credit memo to the same accounts that are assigned to the invoice you are crediting.

Implementation Considerations for Transactions
for Transactions
Payment Terms:
• Discounting?
• Consolidated Billing?
• Split Payment Terms?
AutoAccounting
Source of Table • Allocating Tax and Freight?
Transaction Batch Source?
Value ID
n l y
Non Oracle Systems AutoInvoice
O
Oracle System
e
U s
Implementation Consideration for Transactions
A I
• For AutoAccounting, when using a table as a source of a segment, make sure the General
O
Ledger accounts are defined for the source. With AutoAccounting, for example, if you
select the Company segment to be derived from the transaction type for Revenue, the
d
a n
revenue account must be entered for all transaction types.
• For payment terms, decide on discounting, consolidated billing, split payment terms, and
allocating tax and freight.
a l
r n
• For transaction batch sources, select Value to import a record into AutoInvoice tables
using its actual name (non-Oracle system); select ID to use its internal identifier (Oracle
t e
system). If you use an Oracle system, ID is quicker. Oracle can recognize a record
In
identifier, or ID, quicker than a value because the ID is usually just a few characters in
length. For example, it is quicker to read “2309” rather than “Business World.”
e
c l
r a
O

Implementation Considerations for Remit-To Addresses
for Remit-To Addresses
• Define lockbox addresses as remit-to addresses to

let customers know where to send payment.
• To catch any missing assignments, set up a remit-
to address assigned to a default location.
Define
Remit-To Lockbox
n l y
Address
e O
Address
U s
Implementation Considerations for Remit-To Addresses
A I
• Define lockbox addresses as remit-to addresses to let customers know where to send
payment.
d O
• To catch any missing assignments, set up a remit-to address assigned to a default
a n
location. If you enter or import an invoice with an address that does not correspond to
any of your assignments, it uses the default remit-to address.
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Optional Setup Steps for Transactions
The following are optional setup steps for customer

invoices:
• Accounting Rules
• Salespeople
• Standard Memo Lines
• Document Sequencing
• Statements
• Consolidated Billing
n l y
e O
U s
The following are optional setup steps for customer invoices:
A I
recognitions schedules for your invoices.
d O
• Accounting Rules: If your accounting method is Accrual, use rules to create revenue
a n
• Salespeople: To allocate sales credits to invoices, debit memos and commitments. If you
do not want to assign sales credits for a transaction, you can enter No Sales Credit.
a l
• Standard Memo Lines: To enter predefined lines for debit memos, on-account credits,
and invoices.
r n
t e
• Document Sequencing: To assign unique numbers to documents and account for each
transaction that is entered.
In
• Statements: To create statements to send to customers.
e
c l
- Define Aging Buckets: To review and report on open receivables based on the
number of days each item is past due.
r a - Define Statement Cycles: To control when you create customer statements.
O - Define Messages: To customized the content of customer statements.

• Consolidated Billing: To create consolidated billing invoices to send to customers.
- Define User Profile Option: AR: Show Billing Number to Yes to display the
consolidated billing invoice number in Receivable windows and reports.
- Define New or Update Existing Customer Profiles: To determine which customers
will receive a consolidated billing invoice.
- Define Proxima Payment Terms: To determine the cutoff date and payment terms
used with consolidated billing invoices.
- Assign Payment Terms: To the Bill-To Site of each customer that you set up to
receive a consolidated billing invoice.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Accounting Rules
Accounting Rules
Accounting, Fixed Duration:

Over all periods by a percentage
or evenly.
Accounting, Variable Duration:

Percentage 1st period, remaining
amount evenly over remaining
periods.
Deferred Revenue:
Recognize revenue on demand.
n l y
e O
U s
Defining Accounting Rules
A I
Accounting rules determine when to recognize revenue amounts.
d O
n
• Use Accounting, Fixed Duration type to recognize revenue over a specific number of
a
a l
periods. Revenue can be spread evenly or a percentage can be specified for each period.
• Use the Accounting, Variable Duration type to recognize revenue by a percentage for the
n
first period. The remaining revenue is spread evenly across the number of periods that
r
t e
you specify during transaction entry.
• Use Deferred Accounting Rules to recognize revenue on demand using the Revenue
e In
Accounting feature. Deferred Accounting Rules are enabled by selecting the Deferred
Revenue checkbox on the Invoicing and Accounting Rules window.
c l
r a
O

Salespeople
Salespeople
100 Sales
Today!
Allocate Sales
Credits
Source of
Territory
Required? n l y
e O
U s
Salespeople
A I
(N) > Setup > Transactions > Salespersons/Resources
d
• Define salespeople to allocate sales credit for transactions.
O
n
• Determine the source of the Territory Flexfield default for the Transactions window by
a
System Options window.
a l
entering a value in the Source of Territory field in the Miscellaneous region of the Define
n
• Determine whether a salesperson is required when entering transactions by selecting the
r
window.
t e
check box for Require Salesperson in the Miscellaneous region of the System Options
e In
c l
r a
O

Standard Memo Lines
Standard Memo Lines
Select Line Type:

• Charges
• Freight Tax
Code
• Line
• Tax
Unit Price n l y
e O
U s
Standard Memo Lines
A I
(N) > Setup > Transactions > Memo Lines
d O
Memo lines can be used to define goods or services which are sold frequently, but have not
n
been defined as inventory items such as Annual Maintenance Contracts or Consulting Services.
a
a l
• Select one of the following standard line types: Charges, Freight, Line, or Tax.
• You can enter a tax code to associate with a standard memo line.
r n
• If the price is constant, you can enter a unit price which defaults when this memo line is
used.
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Setting Up Document Sequencing
1. Enable the Sequential Numbering Profile Option.
2. Define Sequences.
3. Assign sequences to categories.
n l y
e O
U s
System Administrator
A I
(N) > Application > Document > Define
d O
• Using the Document sequence number as the transaction number makes tracking
transactions easy.
a n
a l
• Category creation is now automatic. You no longer have to create a category as a separate
step. When you create a transaction type in Oracle Receivables, the document sequencing
n
category is created. (This enhancement is only in Receivables.)
r
Administration Guide.
t e
Note: For more information on Document Sequencing, refer to Oracle Applications System
e In
c l
r a
O

Setting Up Gapless Transaction Numbering
Setting Up Gapless
Transaction Numbering
• Select the Copy Document Number to Transaction

Number check box when defining your transaction
batch sources.
• Set up the AR: Document Number Generation
Level system option.
• Do not select the Allow Invoice Deletion check box
in the System Options window.
20001
20002
20003 n l y
e O
U s
Setting Up Gapless Transactions Numbering
A I
(N) > Setup > Transactions > Sources > (T) Batch Source
d O
Gapless transaction numbering gives a better audit trail and meets legal requirements for some
countries.
a n
a l
• If the Copy Document Number to Transaction Number check box is selected when
creating batch source, it is possible to have duplicate invoice numbers within a batch
source.
r n
t e
- For example, you have to the following settings: the Automatic Numbering check
box in the Batch Source window is selected, the Copy Document Number to
In
Invoice check box is selected in the Batch Source window, and the AR: Document
Number Generation Level system option is set to “When the Transaction is
e
c l
committed.” You create an invoice with a transaction type that does not require
document sequencing so the invoice number is assigned from the batch source. You
r a create another invoice with a transaction type that requires document sequencing.
O The invoice number is created from the document sequence number which has the
same numbering scheme as the batch source.

- To avoid this, assign a different numbering scheme to you document sequence and
attach sources.
• To ensure gapless numbering, the Allow Invoice Deletion check box in the Systems
Options window should not be selected.
Note: When using the document sequencing, the original invoice number is saved to the
underlying tables (OLD_TRX_NUMBER column of the RA_CUSTOMER _TRX_ALL table).
Though not viewable from any window once the document sequence number is assigned to the
transaction, you can query the old transaction number by entering & in the transaction number
field while in query mode. Then press [Ctlr] + [F11] to run the query. When a small window
opens, enter the Where criteria for the OLD_TRX_NUMBER and click the OK button.
Note: If you do not select the Copy Document Number to Invoice Option, Oracle Receivables
do not allow duplicate transactions within a batch.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Setting Up Statements
Define Statement
Cycles
Weekly
Bi-Monthly
Define Aging
Buckets
Monthly
PAST DUE!!! Quarterly
PAY NOW!!!
n l y
Define Custom Messages
e O
U s
A I
(N) Setup > Collections > Aging Buckets
(N) Setup > Print > Statement Cycles
d O
(N) Setup > Print > Standard Messages
a n
a l
Statements communicate activity to your customers about invoices, credit memos, debit
memos, payments, on-account credits, chargebacks, deposits, and adjustments.
r n
• Define Aging Buckets for statements. Oracle Receivables also prints your customer’s
e
past due balances based on aging buckets.
t
In
• Define Statement Cycles.
• Define Messages (optional). You can enhance your statements by printing your own
l e
custom messages.
c
r a
O

Consolidated Billing Invoices
Difference between a consolidated billing invoice and

a statement.
Statement Consolidated Billing Invoice
Used for informational Customer pays from the invoice
purposes
Includes aging Does not include aging
Customers selected by Customers selected by cutoff date
statement cycle and payment terms
n l y
e O
U s
A Consolidated Billing Invoice includes the following information:
A I
• A beginning balance.
d O
• Payments received since the previous consolidated billing invoice.
n
• An itemized list of new charges (invoices, credit memos, adjustment) in either summary
a
or detail format.
• Separate reporting of taxes.
a l
r n
• The total balance due for this customer.
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Setting Up Consolidated Billing
Assign Payment Terms to

Customer Accounts
Last Day of 10001

the Month
option 10002
10003
Set: Show Billing Number System Option
to Yes n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Customers > Standard > Addresses > (B) Open
d O
a n
a l
• Define payment terms for consolidated billing. The payment term becomes the selection
criteria that Receivables uses to select invoices to be part of the consolidated invoice.
r n
• Assign these payment terms to customers.
t e
• Assign consolidated billing to customers through the profile class.
In
• Set the Show Billing Number system option to Yes to show the billing number in the
various transactions windows. Note: This system option migrated from a profile option
e
l
with 11i.AR.H.
c
r a
O

Transaction Printing Views Overview

Printing Views are used to:
• Easily create invoices to suit your business needs.
• Save time and costs in customizing invoices.
Invoice
Transaction
views
Printed
invoice
n l y
e O
U s
A I
Transaction Printing Views are used for developers to access the transaction tables to
O
customize invoices. In the past, a developer had to be very familiar with the transaction tables
to be able to customize the invoices. Now, the developer does not need to know the tables
d
because the view extracts the information.
a n
• Although Oracle Receivables makes extracting transaction information easier, the person
l
who creates the customized invoice must still know SQL.
a
r n
• A view contains a SQL select statement.
• You use views to select information from the tables, such as the transaction tables.
t e
• A view can reference multiple tables so that when you point to a view, Oracle
e In
Receivables retrieves the data from these tables without needing to know all the tables.
• There are modules that create the view structure for the transaction printing procedure.
c l
- You must run these modules in the order in which that appear, because
r a dependencies exist between some of the files.

- For more information about these views, see the Oracle Receivables User Guide,
O Release 11i, Appendix H.

Transaction Printing Views
Transaction Printing Views
• AR_INVOICE_HEADER_V
• AR_INVOICE_ADJ_V
• AR_INVOICE_LINES_V
• AR_INVOICE_TAX_SUMMARY_V
• AR_INVOICE_COMMITMENT_INFO_V
• AR_INVOICE_TOTALS_V
• AR_INVOICE_INSTALLMENTS_V
• AR_INVOICE_COUNT_TERMS_V
n l y
e O
U s
New Transaction Printing Views
A
• AR_INVOICE_HEADER_V: The main view. It retrieves the header information of the I
• AR_INVOICE_ADJ_V: Retrieves the details for an adjustment.
d O
report. It has two parts, one of adjustments and one of nonadjustments.
AR_INVOICE_HEADER_V.
a n
• AR_INVOICE_LINES_V: Retrieved the line items of each transaction retrieved by
a l
• AR_INVOICE_TAX_SUMMARY_V: Retrieved tax summary information for a
transaction.
r n
transaction.
t e
• AR_INVOICE_COMMITMENT_INFO_V: Retrieves commitment information for a
e In
• AR_INVOICE_TOTALS_V: Retrieves the total amounts for all lines and associated
charges for a transaction (for example, lines, freight, and tax).
c l
• AR_INVOICE_INSTALLMENTS_V: Retrieves installment information for
r atransactions with multiple installments.

• AR_INVOICE_COUNT_TERMS_V: Retrieves the number of terms for a transaction
O (that is, transactions assigned to split payment terms.)

Agenda
Agenda
• Entering invoice setup information

• Major implementation considerations
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Define Transaction Types in Order
Define transaction types in the following order:

• Credit memo
• Invoice
• Debit memo
• Chargeback
• Bills receivable
• Deposit
• Guarantee
n l y
e O
U s
A I
Define transaction types in this order so that you can associate one type with another. For
O
example, define a credit memo first and then an invoice. Enter the credit memo in the Credit
Memo Type field when you create the invoice transaction type. When you create a credit
d
n
memo for the invoice, the credit memo transaction type is defaulted.
a
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Implementation Considerations for Document Sequencing
Enhancements
for Document Sequencing Enhancements
Different Numbering Schemes Document Sequence

Type
20001
10001 20002 Gapless
10002 20003
Manual
10003
Automatic
y
X l
Do Not Allow
Deletion of
Transactions
O n
s e
I U
Implementation Considerations for Document Sequencing Enhancements
O
• What type of document sequence should be used: Gapless, Automatic, or Manual?
A
n d
• Document sequences and batch source sequences should have different numbering
schemes. This is to prevent duplicate numbering before a transaction has a status of
Complete.
l a
a
• For gapless transaction numbering, do not allow deletion of invoices.
n
t e r
e In
c l
r a
O

Function Security
Function Security
Function Name Activities That Can Be Restricted
Transactions: Complete Complete transactions
Transactions: Dispute Place transactions in dispute
Transactions: Copy Copy transactions
Transactions: Print Print transactions
Inv: View View invoices

Inv: Enter Enter invoices
Inv: Update
Inv: Delete
Update invoices
n l y
Delete invoices
e O
U s
Function Security
A I
• If you exclude the Transactions: Dispute function from the Transactions workbench, it is
automatically excluded from the Collections workbench.
d O
• The Copy and Print activities can be accessed either from a button or from the menu.
a n
Excluding the function disables access from the button. The system administrator must
remove access from the menu when defining menu structures.
l
• You can set up the same function security for debit memos (DM), credit memos (CM),
a
r n
and on-account credits (OnAcc) as for invoices (Inv). Additionally, you can also set
function security for applying on-account credits (OnAcc: Applications).
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Summary
Summary

• Enter set up information relating to invoicing
• Discuss the major implementation considerations
in customer invoicing
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O

Manual Receipts
Chapter 16
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Chapter 16 - Page 1
Manual Receipts
Manual Receipts
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Chapter 16 - Page 2
Objectives
Objectives
After this lesson, you should be able to:

• Describe the Receipt Process
• Apply receipts using different methods
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Chapter 16 - Page 3
Agenda
Agenda
• Overview of Receipt Process

• Applying receipts
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Chapter 16 - Page 4
Create Profile
Classes
Enter Create Print Post

Customers Invoices Invoices Receipts
Use
iReceivables
Perform
Collections n l y
e O
U s
A I
The Oracle Receivables process consist of several major steps. The Post Receipts steps will be
discussed in this topic.
d O
• Create Profile Classes: Defines several default values for customers with similar credit
terms and invoicing requirements.
a n
• Enter Customers: Creates information for the customer, defines the address for the
l
customer, and the business purpose(s) at each address.
a
goods and services.
r n
• Create Invoices: Uses AutoInvoice or manually created invoices to bill customers for
t e
• Print Invoices: Produces invoices to mail to customers.
e In
• Use iReceivables: Allows customers and employees to access customer accounts on line
to see the status of invoices and receipts and to request credits on line.
c l
• Post Receipts: Permits posting of customer payments as they are received.
r a
• Perform Collections: Enables collectors to use informational screens to perform timely
and accurate collection activities.
O
Manual Receipts
Chapter 16 - Page 5
Overview of Receipts
Apply to
Enter receipt customer
account or
invoice
Update
customer
balance
Clear Reconcile
receipt bank
statement
n l y
e O
U s
A I
You can handle a receipt from a customer in several ways, depending on the amount of the
receipt and total amount owed by the customer.
• A customer may pay:
d O
n
- Full amount due for a specific invoice or group of invoices.
a
a l
- Partial payment on a specified invoice.
- Payment on the remaining balance in an account.
r n
- Overpay on account creating an on-account credit.
t e
• If the customer does not provide clear and sufficient information, you may not be able to
In
accurately identify the customer and properly apply the receipt.
c l e
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Chapter 16 - Page 6
Receipt Creation
Receipt Creation
Receipts are created in one of three ways:
Manual QuickCash Automatic

receipts receipts receipts
• Cash • Cash • Credit Cards

• Miscellaneous • AutoLockbox • Bills of Exchange
• Direct Debits
n l y
e O
U s
Receipt Creation
Receipts are created in one of three ways:
A I
d O
• Manual Receipts: Cash and Miscellaneous receipts can be manually applied to
transactions or customer accounts. The Manual Receipt entry method provides more
a n
control over the application of individual receipts to specific items.
• QuickCash Receipts: Cash and AutoLockbox receipts can be applied using QuickCash
l
receipts. Use this method when you need to enter and apply receipts quickly, because it
a
r n
only requires a minimal amount of information for each receipt and application. Also,
QuickCash provides an extra level of control for entering high volume receipts because it
t e
does not immediately affect your customer’s account balance. Permits using AutoCash
In
rules, placing receipts on-account and enter them as unidentified or unapplied.
• Automatic Receipts: Credit Cards, Bills of Exchange, and Direct Debits can all use
e
c l
Automatic Receipts to automatically generate receipts for customers with whom you
have predefined agreements. These agreements let you collect payments on time by
r a transferring funds from the customer's bank account to yours on the receipt maturity date.
O For more information, refer to the Oracle Receivables User Guide or 11i Order to Cash
Advanced Topic on Automatic Receipts.
Manual Receipts
Chapter 16 - Page 7
Cash Receipt Statuses
Confirmed
Remitted
Cleared
Approved Reversed n l y
e O
U s
Five receipt statuses are available:
A I
only valid for automatic receipts.
d O
• Approved: This receipt has been approved for automatic receipt creation. This status is
a n
• Confirmed: For manually entered receipts, this status indicates the receipt belongs to a
receipt class that requires remittance. For automatic receipts, this status indicates the
receipt has been confirmed.
a l
r
manually entered receipts. n
• Remitted: This receipt has been remitted. This status is valid for both automatic and
t e
• Cleared: The payment of this receipt was transferred to your bank account and the bank
In
statement has been reconciled within Receivables. This status is valid for both automatic
and manually entered receipts.
e
c l
• Reversed: This receipt has been reversed. You can reverse a receipt when your customer
r a stops payment on a receipt, if a receipt come from an account with non-sufficient fund, or
if you want to re-enter and reapply it in Receivables. You can reverse cash receipts and
O miscellaneous transactions.
Manual Receipts
Chapter 16 - Page 8
Manual Receipt Entry Process
Create Enter
Apply
a batch receipts
receipts
Post
to GL Enter
chargebacks
and
adjustments
Remit
receipts
n l y
e O
U s
A
Use the Receipts or Receipts Batches windows to begin the manual entry process.I
ability to:
d O
• Create a Batch: (Optional) Receipts are entered in batches or groups. Batches provide the
n
- View the difference between control and actual counts and amounts.
a
a l
- Group related receipts together that share the same default attributes.
- Manage the time consuming task of data entry.
r n
- Note: Batches are optional for Cash Receipts, but required for QuickCash receipts.
t e
• Enter Receipts: Enter each receipt individually or in batches.
In
• Apply Receipts: Apply receipts to transactions or on-account.
• Enter Chargeback and Adjustments: Create adjustments and chargebaceks against
e
l
transaction to which you are applying a receipt.
c
r a
• Post to GL (General Ledger): Transfer the receipt transaction accounting to the General
Ledger for recording.
O • Remit Receipts: Remit receipts to collect funds from Customer accounts.
Manual Receipts
Chapter 16 - Page 9
Manual Receipt Types
Manual QuickCash
Receipts Receipts
• Cash • Cash
• Miscellaneous
n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Receipts > Receipts
O
Manual Receipts: Provides more control over the application of individual receipts. In the
d
Receipts window, you can enter a receipt, specify the customer, reverse a receipt, and apply a
a n
receipt to one or many invoices using mass apply. Receipt Types are Cash or Miscellaneous.
a l
• Cash Receipts: Payment (such as cash or a check) that you receive from your customers
for goods or services. Account balances are updated as soon as the receipts are saved.
r n
• Miscellaneous Receipts: Non-invoice related revenue earned from investments, interest,
transactions.
t e
refunds, and stock sales. Receivables Activities determine the accounting for these
e In
(N) > Receipts > Batches > Manual-Quick
c l
QuickCash Receipts: Posts receipts and updates account balances after running the Post
r a
QuickCash program rather than when the information is entered. Requires Batching.
• Cash Receipts: Payments, entered in batches that you receive from your customers for
O goods or services.
Manual Receipts
Manual Receipts Versus QuickCash Receipts
Manual Receipts
Versus QuickCash Receipts
Manual Receipts QuickCash Receipts

Apply receipts using the Apply receipts using QuickCash
Applications or Mass Apply window and AutoCash rules.
windows.
Post receipts information Post receipts after running the
after applying receipts. Post QuickCash program.
Enter GL Date and Deposit Enter GL Date and Deposit Date
Date at batch level and at batch level and change dates
change dates at receipt level. at receipt level.
Create adjustments and Create adjustments or
chargebacks for debit items
with applied receipts.
chargebacks after Post
QuickCash is run.
n l y
e O
U s
Manual Receipts Versus QuickCash Receipts
A I
Another difference between Manual Receipts and QuickCash Receipts is that manual receipts
O
update a customer’s balance, while QuickCash receipts do not immediately affect a customer’s
balance. After reviewing a QuickCash batch for accuracy, you must run Post QuickCash to
d
update your customer's account balances.
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Guided Demostration - Enter Manual Receipts
1. Receipt Number: Demo-CK01
2. Receipt Type: Select Cash from the LOV
3. Receipt Amount: $4,500.00
4. Payment Method: Check – BofA
5. Customer Name: Enter Your Standard Customer
6. (I) Save
7. Select the New Icon and enter a second check (Demo-CK02) for $8,200.00 on the same
customer
8. (I) Save
9. Select the New icon and enter a third check in Canadian Dollars. Select CAD in the current
field for (DEMO-CK03) for 11,050.00 on the same customer. n l y
10. (I) Save.
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Practice - Enter Manual Receipts
Overview
In this practice you will enter manual receipts.
Assumptions
• Replace XX with the characters or numbers given by your instructor.
• Use Responsibility: Receivables, Vision Operations (USA).
Tasks
1. Enter manual receipts.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Solution - Enter Manual Receipts
Enter Manual Receipts
1. Receipt Number: Your Initials-CK01.
2. Receipt Type: Select Cash from the LOV.
11. Receipt Amount: $4,500.00.
12. Payment Method: Check - BofA.
13. Customer Name: Enter Your Standard Customer.
14. (I) Save.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
l
15. Select the New Icon to enter a second check.
c
r a
16. Receipt Number: Your Initials-CK02.
O
17. Receipt Type: Cash.
Manual Receipts
18. Receipt Amount: $8,200.00.
20. Customer Name: Enter Your Standard Customer.
21. (I) Save.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
22. Select the New Icon to enter a third check
23. Receipt Number: Your Initials-CK03

d O
a n
24. Receipt Type: Cash
a l
25. Receipt Amount: 11,050.00
r n
t e
In
27. Customer Name: Enter Your Standard Customer
e
28. (I) Save
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Creating Batches
Creating Batches
Receipt
Class
Payment Method
Deposit Date Lockbox
Apply Date
GL Date n l y
e O
U s
Creating Batches
A I
(N) > Receipts > Batches
d O
Use batches to eliminate repetitive data entry by creating default batch-level information.
n
• Define the following default values for a group of receipts:
a
a l
- Receipt class: Determines the stages involved in receipt to cash cycles. These stages
involved confirmation, remittance, and reconciliation.
r n
- Payment method: Provides accounting flexfield and bank account defaults.
t e
- Deposit date: Default Batch Date and Deposit Date are the current date but can be
In
changed.
- GL date: Default GL date is the day of the most recent open period but can be
l e
changed to any open or future enterable period.
c
- Apply date: Date the receipt is applied.
r a
• You can change default values for specific receipts, if necessary.
O
Manual Receipts
Validating Receipts in Batches
Enter a Enter
Control Receipts
Count and
Amount
15 Receipts
$10,000 = 13 Receipts
$10,000
l y
On
se
I U
control total. The process is:
O A
One of the advantages of batching is the ability to validate that the receipts entered tie to the
n d
• Enter the receipt count and the total receipt amount for the batch.
• The actual count and amount is updated as each receipt is entered.
l a
• Difference between control count, amount, and actual count and amount indicate
potential data-entry errors.
n a
t e r
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Batch Statuses
Batch Statuses
Status Description
New Creating a new batch. The status
of the batch changes to Out of
Balance, Open, or Closed when
receipts are saved for the first
time.
Out of Balance Actual count and amount of
receipts do not match the control
count and amount.
Open Actual count and amount match
the control count and amount,
but the batch includes unapplied
or unidentified receipts.
Closed Actual count and amount match
the control count and amount. All
receipts have been identified and
applied to invoices or applied on
n l y
account.
e O
U s
Batch Statuses
A I
A batch has a status that indicates whether it is complete. Receivables automatically updates
O
the batch status of a receipt batch when you add new or apply existing receipts in the batch.
d
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Guided Demonstration - Create Receipt Batch
(N) > Receipts > Batches
1. Batch Type: Manual-Regular
2. Batch Source: Hand Deposit - BofA (Receipt Class, Payment Method, Bank Name and
Number will Default in automatically)
29. Control Totals: Count - 2, Amount - 15,400.00
30. Select the (B) Receipts
31. Receipt Number: Demo-CK03
32. Receipt Type: Cash
33. Currency: CAD
34. Receipt Amount: 11,050.00
35. Select Your Standard Customer

n l y
36. Select the New Icon and enter a second check (Demo-CK04) for 4,350.00 but do not select a
customer
e O
37. (I) Save (Close the receipt window and review the batch totals.)
U s
Note the Unidentified amount for CK04.
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Agenda
Agenda
• Overview of the Receipt process

• Applying receipts
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Applying Batch Receipts
$4,000
Multiple
invoices
$1,000
Single
Receipt batch control: invoice
3 receipts, $10,000
$5,000 On-account
n l y
e O
U s
A I
When you enter receipts and applications in a QuickCash batch or import them using
O
AutoLockbox, Receivables stores the data in an interim table. QuickCash lets you apply your
receipts to one or many transactions, use AutoCash rules, place receipts on-account, or enter
d
them as unidentified or unapplied.
a n
• Use the QuickCash window to review receipts and ensure that application information is
correct.
a l
r n
• Run Post QuickCash to update the customer's account balances.
Note: If you do not identify the customer for a receipt, Receivables automatically assigns the
t e
receipt a status of Unidentified.
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Applying Receipts to an Invoice
$100 Fully
invoice applied
$80 $20
$80 Invoice Applied Unapplied
Customer On-account
Pays $100 No Invoice
Unidentified
customer n l y
e O
U s
A I
Use the Applications or Mass Apply windows to apply your receipts or on-account credits.
d O
• Apply receipts to multiple invoices, single invoice, or on-account.
• Apply a receipt to open debit items to reduce the outstanding balance.
n
• Control who can create adjustments and chargebacks with the profile option AR: Cash-
a
Allow Actions.
a l
In the Application Summary tabbed region of the Receipts window, receipts are shown as:
r n
• Applied: Receipt is matched to a transaction.
t e
• On-Account: The amount of the receipt is put on the customers account and may be
In
applied later.
• Unapplied: Receipt has not been applied to a transaction.
l e
• Unidentified: Customer for this receipt has not been identified.
c
r a
Note: Partially applied receipts will have a status of ‘unapplied’ until they are fully applied.
O
Manual Receipts
Applications Window
Applications Window
Pounds Yen
Apply to
Invoices
Different Currencies
Adjustments &
Write offs
Cash On
Apply Discounts
Chargeback
n l y
Account
e O
U s
Applications Window
A I
(N) > Receipts > Receipts > (B) Applications
In the Applications window, you can:
d O
n
• Apply a receipt to many invoices or put cash on account.
a
a l
• Apply a receipt to an invoice in a different currency.
• Create an adjustment to write off a transaction balance or unappled receipt balances.
r n
• Create a chargeback to create a new transaction for the balance of a transaction.
• Apply discounts.
t e
e In
• Refund all or part of a previously remitted credit card receipt.
• Put invoice related short payments or non-invoice related over payments or short
l
payments into claim investigation. Note: When you create a claim for an invoice,
c
r a Receivables places the related invoice in dispute until the claim is resolved. (only for
users of Oracle Marketing Online’s Trade management functionality.)
O
Manual Receipts
Guided Demonstration - Apply Receipts

1. Use Query (F11) to retrieve Demo-CK01
2. Select the (B) Applications
3. Place your cursor in the Transaction Number field and choose a transaction number from the
LOV to apply against
4. Select the Apply Check Box
5. (I) Save
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Practice - Apply Receipt
Overview
In this practice you will apply receipts.
Assumptions
Tasks
1. Apply Receipt.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Solution - Apply Receipt
Apply Receipt
1. Use (F11) to Query your first Receipt (Your Initials-CK01).
2. Select the (B) Applications.
LOV to apply against.
39. Select the Apply Check Box.
40. (I) Save.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Criteria for Mass Applying Receipts
Criteria for Mass Applying Receipts

Sort Criterion Business Need
Balance Due Apply receipts to transactions based on
the balance due. To pay the largest
balances first, use descending order.
Due Date Apply receipts based on due date. To
pay the oldest balances first, use
ascending order.
Invoice Date Apply receipts in FIFO or LIFO order by
sorting on invoice date and using
ascending or descending order,
respectively.
Invoice Number Use invoice numbers, if they follow a
meaningful pattern. For example, if
invoices are numbered sequentially, sort
invoices by number to ensure that the n l y
oldest invoice is paid first.
e O
U s
Criteria For Mass Applying Receipts
A I
(N) > Receipts > Receipts > (B) Mass Apply
d O
In the Mass Apply window, receipts can be applied en masse based on certain sort criteria.
When using the Mass Apply window:
a n
a l
• Apply a receipt to open debit items automatically.
• Apply receipts based on the criteria you specify.
r n
• Review receipts before applying them or apply the receipts automatically.
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Guided Demonstration - Use Mass Apply
2. Select the (B) Mass Apply
3. Select Balance Due in the Primary Sort Criteria field by Ascending order
4. Choose the (B) Apply
5. (I) Save
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Practice - Use Mass Apply
Overview
In this practice you will use mass apply.
Assumptions
Tasks
1. Create a new profile class.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Solution – Use Mass Apply
Create a new profile class
1. Use (F11) to Query your second Receipt (Your Initials-CK02).
2. Select the (B) Mass Apply.
3. Select Balance Due in the Primary Sort Criteria field by Ascending order.
4. Choose the (B) Apply.
5. Save.
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Applying Cross Currency Receipts
Invoice Receipt
currency currency
BEF EUR
Manual
or QuickCash n l y
e O
U s
A I
(N) > Receipts > Receipts > (B) Applications
d O
Customers may pay for transactions with a currency that is different from the currency on the
transaction.
a n
a l
Note: For clients that are upgrading from previous release, the AR: Enable Cross Currency
profile option is now obsolete. Receivables will now operate as if this option is set to Yes.
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Guided Demonstration - Apply Cross Currency Receipt
2. Select the (B) Applications
LOV to apply against
4. Select the Apply Check Box (Note the Gain/Loss for this Cross Currency Receipt)
5. (I) Save
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Entering Discounts
Entering Discounts
Unearned
Earned and
Discount Partial
Discount
Automatically Entered
Calculated Manually
n l y
e O
U s
Entering Discounts
A I
You can review the Earned and Unearned discounts on the debit items to which this receipt
was applied.
d O
• Earned discounts are automatically calculated according to the payment terms on the
transaction.
a n
• Unearned and partial discounts are entered manually.
a l
• Use system options, customer profiles, and payment terms to control discount calculation.
n
• Use the maximum discount column to view the amount of allowable discount.
r
t e
• The largest Unearned discount a customer can take is the best Earned discount ever
available for the invoice.
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts
Summary
Summary

• Describe the receipt process
• Apply receipts using different methods
n l y
e O
U s
A I
d O
a n
a l
r n
t e
e In
c l
r a
O
Manual Receipts

AR O2C Cycle

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AR O2C Cycle

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

11i Order To Cash

Restricted Rights Legend

Eric O'Brien, Pam Freeman, Jinny Valenzuela, Kathy Wohnutka

Technical Contributors and Reviewers

Order To Cash Lifecycle Overview................................................................................................................1-1

O Defining Locations ........................................................................................................................................3-27

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

OHold Names ...................................................................................................................................................7-48

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

O Practice - Copy Price List ..........................................................................................................................9-31

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

Modifier Structure .........................................................................................................................................9-77

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

Guided Demonstration – Define Shipping Exceptions..............................................................................11-78

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

Oracle Receivables Overview .......................................................................................................................13-5

Guided Demonstration - Review Transaction Workbench........................................................................13-8

O Creating Invoices with Rules.........................................................................................................................13-36

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

O Grouping Rule Hierarchy ..............................................................................................................................14-18

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

Guided Demonstration - Create Payment Terms .......................................................................................15-12

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

O System Options For Accounting....................................................................................................................17-30

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

O Practice - Deferred Tax Codes...................................................................................................................18-55

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

• Knowledge of the overall Order Entry to Bank Reconciliation processes

• Ability to navigate in Oracle Applications

• R11i Navigating Oracle Applications

How This Course Is Organized

Oracle Cash Management User Guide

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Oracle Receivables User Guide

Oracle CRL-Financials Implementation Guide

Oracle Order Management User's Guide

Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2001. All rights reserved.

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

• System release bulletins

• Installation and user’s guides

11i Order To Cash Fundamentals Table of Contents

Caps and Buttons, Click the Executable button.

Courier new, Code output, Code output: debug.set (‘I”, 300);

Initial cap Graphics labels

Emphasized words Do not save changes to the database.

This subject is covered in Unit II, Lesson 3, “Working with